Home
        Samsung CLX-6200FX multifunctional
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                                       want from the Options window                                                           31  Using Smart Panel       Using Your Printer in  Linux    You can use your machine in a Linux environment     This chapter includes    e Getting Started   e Installing the Unified Linux Driver   e Using SetIP program   e Using the Unified Driver Configurator  e Configuring Printer Properties   e Printing a Document    e Scanning a Document       Getting Started    The supplied CD  ROM provides you with Samsung s Unified  Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux  computer     Samsung s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and  scanner drivers  providing the ability to print documents and  scan images  The package also delivers powerful applications  for configuring your machine and further processing of the  scanned documents     After the driver is installed on your Linux system  the driver  package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via  fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously     The acquired documents can then be edited  printed on the  same local or network machine devices  sent by e mail   uploaded to an FTP site  or transferred to an external OCR  system     The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and  flexible installation program  You don t need to search for  additional components tha
2.                                                            e For MAC OS 10 4  if Auto Select does not work properly     select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name i  in Model       For MAC OS 10 5  if Auto Select does not work properly  i  select Select a driver to use    and your printer name    in Print Using   Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the    default printer                                                                                                                                              7 Click Add     43  Using Your Printer with a Macintosh          Printing       NOTE   e The Macintosh printer s properties window that appears in    this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use   However the composition of the printer properties window is    similar     e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD   ROM        Printing a Document    When you print with a Macintosh  you need to check the printer  software setting in each application you use  Follow these steps    to print from a Macintosh     1 Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want    to print    2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup  Document  Setup in some applications     3 Choose your paper size  orientation  scaling  and other  options and click OK     Settings  f Page Attributes Hj    Format for  BJ          Make sure that your    Paper Size    US Letter printer is selected     21 59 cm             Orientation  LG ic a  Sca
3.       Package e Paper  5 8 Kg  12 7 lbs   weight e Plastic  1 8 Kg  3 9 lbs   Fusing 180   C  356   F   temperature       a  DADF  CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX   ADF  CLX 6200FX   b  Sound Pressure Level  ISO 7779    c  Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798  The number of  pages may be affected by operating environment  printing interval  media  type  and media size     d  It varies depending on the product configuration     Specifications_ 99    PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS          ITEM    DESCRIPTION       Printing method    Color laser beam printing       Printing speed       CLX 6200 Series  Up to 20 ppm  A4   21 ppm   Letter   CLX 6240 Series  Up to 24 ppm A4   25 ppm   Letter        Duplex printing  speed    CLX 6200 Series  Up to 7 ipm  A4 Letter   CLX 6240 Series  Up to 10 ipm  A4 Letter        First print out  time    Black  amp   White    e CLX 6200 Series  From ready  Less than 25 seconds    CLX 6240 Series  From ready  Less than 19 seconds    From coldboot  Less than 75 seconds    From coldboot  Less than 80 seconds       Color    e CLX 6200 Series  From ready  Less than 25 seconds    CLX 6240 Series  From ready  Less than 19 seconds       From coldboot  Less than 75 seconds    From coldboot  Less than 80 seconds       Print resolution    Max  2 400 x 600 dpi effective output       Printer language    CLX 6200ND  CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX    SPL C  PostScript 3  PCL6  CLX 6240FX  PostScript 3  PCL6       OS compatibility       Windows  2000 XP 2003 V
4.      Configuration This list shows the status of the user selectable  options  You may print this list to confirm your  changes after changing settings              Supplies Info This list shows the current status of consumables  in your machine    Address Book This list shows all of the fax numbers and email  addresses currently stored in the machine s  memory    Send Report This report shows the fax number  the number of    pages  the elapsed time of the job  the  communication mode  and the communication  results for a particular fax job    You can set up your machine to automatically print  a transmission confirmation report after each fax  job  See page 56        Sent Report This report shows information on the faxes and  emails you have recently sent    You can set the machine to automatically print this  report every 50 communications  See page 56        Fax RCV Report This report shows information on the faxes you  have recently received        Schedule Jobs This list shows the documents currently stored for  delayed faxes along with the starting time and type  of each operation        Junk Fax Report This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk  fax numbers  To add or delete numbers to or from  this list  access the Junk Fax Setup menu    See page 56        Network Info  This list shows information on your machine   s  network connection and configuration           62 Maintenance       Replacing the toner cartridge   Replacing the paper transfer belt  Maintenanc
5.      Deleting a Page Overlay    You can delete page overlays that you no longer use     OURA WNE    In the printer properties window  click the Extras tab   Click the Edit button in the Overlay section    Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay  List box    Click Delete Overlay    When a confirming message window appears  click Yes   Click OK until you exit the Print window        4 Using Windows    PostScript Driver    If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your  system CD ROM to print a document     PPDs  in combination with the PostScript driver  access printer  features and allow the computer to communicate with the  printer  An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the  supplied software CD ROM        Printer Settings    You can use the printer properties window  which allows you to  access all of the printer options you need when using your  printer  When the printer properties are displayed  you can  review and change the settings needed for your print job   Your printer properties window may differ  depending on your  operating system  This Software User s Guide shows the  Properties window for Windows XP    Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use        NOTES    e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  in the printer driver  Change all print settings available in  the software application first  and change any remaining  setting
6.     Bucraocs           e Refresh   Renews the classes list     Add Class      Allows you to add a new printer class     Remove Class   Removes the selected printer class     Scanners Configuration    In this window  you can monitor the activity of scanner devices   view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices  change device  properties  and scan images        ag  canners configeration  Switches to Ss   aai  Scanners    configuration  ike Shows all of the    installed scanners     Shows the vendor        Selected manner          model name and type Vendor  of your scanner  aus    a 7     ma        Properties      Allows you to change the scan properties  and scan a document  See page 38     Using Your Printer in Linux       36    Ports Configuration    In this window  you can view the list of available ports  check  the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy  state when its owner is terminated for any reason     2 Unified Driver Configurator    r Port configuration    Pieseserw LL       idevimfpO Jdevimfp  Jdevimfp2  devimfp3  SERERE     Switches to       idevimfpS idevimfp6 fdevimfn7  idevimfp8 sdevinfp9   Help      ports mre   h    configuration  ste E ns ellai ire  available ports           Shows the port type   device connected to  the port and status       Selected port         qfbnzzHzHzHQJ  Port type  USB Device   Port is unused     4                      e Refresh   Renews the available ports list   e Release port   Releases the selected port   
7.     Do not use creased  damp  or highly curled paper    Do not mix paper types in a tray    Use only recommended print media   See  Setting the paper size and   type  on page 38        Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the  tray  or facing down in the multi purpose tray     CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS       When an original jams while passing through the DADF  or ADF    Document Jam appears on the display     Input Misfeed    For the ADF    CLX 6200FX only    1  Remove any remaining pages from the ADF   2  Open the ADF cover           1 ADF cover          e Understanding display messages    Solving other problems    3  Rotate the bushing on the right end of the ADF roller toward the ADF      and remove the roller from the slot  2   Pull the document gently  to the left and out of the ADF        This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its  model     4  Align the left end of the ADF roller with the slot and push the right  end of the ADF roller into the right slot       Rotate the bushing on  the right end of the roller toward the document input tray            5  Close the ADF cover  Then load the removed page s   if any  back  into the ADF     64 To prevent document jams  use the scanner glass for thick  thin  or  mixed paper type originals     Troubleshooting 71    For the DADF     CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only   1  Remove any remaining pages from the DADF   2  Open the DADF cover           1 DADF cover       3  Pull
8.     MAINTAINING THE CARTRIDGE    Toner cartridge storage    Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light   temperature  and humidity  Samsung suggests users follow the  recommendations to ensure the optimum performance  highest quality  and  longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge        Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in   this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions  The  toner cartridge should remain in its original  unopened package until  installation     If original packaging is not available  cover the top opening of  the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet     Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful  shelf and operating life  Do not store on the floor  If the toner cartridge is  removed from the printer  always store the cartridge     e Inside the protective bag from the original package  e Correct side up in a horizontal position  not standing on end     Do not store consumables in     Temperature greater than 40  C  104  F      Humidity range less than 20  and not greater than 80      An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature     Direct sunlight or room light     Dusty places     Acar for a long period of time     An environment where corrosive gases are present     An environment with salty air     Handling instructions      Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge     
9.     Net Accounting function limits the number of use for fax  printer  copy and  scan  First  user need to install Net account Plug in from SyncThru    Web  Admin Service  Create user account by entering user ID and Password in  SyncThru    Web Admin Service     If you are not registered  request Administrator for a registration   See page   26    1  Press Menu  27  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears    3  Press the left right arrow until Net Accounting appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears and press  OK     e Protect  Select the option for which you want to enable or disable  Net Accounting     e Chg Password  The access password code can be changed   5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Changing the font setting  Your machine has preset the font for your region or country     If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as  the DOS environment  you can change the font setting as follows     1     2     Oe Or Or RO    Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided  software CD     Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar  or  Notification Area in Linux   You can also click Smart Panel on the status  bar in Mac OS X     Click Printer Setting    Click Emulation    Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting   Click Setting    Select your preferred font in the Symbol
10.     Printing on Both Sides of Paper    You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper  Before printing    decide how you want your document oriented    The options are    e Printer Setting  if you select this option  this feature is  determined by the setting you ve made on the control  panel of the printer  If this option does not appear   your printer does not have this feature    e None     Long Edge  which is the conventional layout used in  book binding       Short Edge  which is the type often used with calendars              Y                    Y                            LE    ill    ni  fc   o  ka  NG                            web                                 aj                      A Long Edge A Short Edge   e Reverse Duplex Printing  allows you to select general  print order compare to duplex print order  If this option  does not appear  your printer does not have this  feature                                      t  l       NOTE  Do not print on both sides of labels  transparencies   envelopes  or thick paper  Paper jamming and damage to the  printer may result        1 To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties     Printing a  Document    on page 14    From the Layout tab  select the paper orientation    From the Double sided Printing section  select the  binding option you want    Click the Paper tab and select the paper source  size  and  type    Click OK and print the document     au Ff WN       NOTE   f your
11.     Spool32     or     Illegal Operation     messages appear     Close all other applications  reboot Windows  and try printing again           Fail To Print        A  printer timeout error  occurred     messages  appear        These messages may appear during printing   Just keep waiting until the machine finishes  printing  If the message appears in ready mode  or after printing has been completed  check the  connection and or whether an error has  occurred        64 Refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with your  computer for further information on Windows error messages     Common Linux problems          CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS    CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS          The machine does  not print     e    Check if the printer driver is installed in your  system  Open Unified Driver configurator  and switch to the Printers tab in Printers  configuration window to look at the list of  available printers  Make sure that your  machine is displayed on the list  If not  invoke    Add new printer wizard to set up your device     e Check if the printer is started  Open Printers  configuration and select your machine on the  printers list  Look at the description in the  Selected printer pane  If its status contains      stopped     string  press the Start button   After that normal operation of the printer  should be restored  The    stopped    status  might be activated when some problems in  printing occurred  For instance  this could be  an attemp
12.     Your printer properties window may differ  depending on your  operating system  This Software User s Guide shows the  Properties window for Windows XP     Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use     If you access printer properties through the Printers folder  you  can view additional Windows based tabs  refer to your  Windows User   s Guide  and the Printer tab  see    Printer Tab     on page 18         NOTES    e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  in the printer driver  Change all print settings available in  the software application first  and change any remaining  settings using the printer driver    e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  using the current program  To make your changes  permanent  make them in the Printers folder       The following procedure is for Windows XP  For other  Windows OS  refer to the corresponding Windows User s  Guide or online help    1  Click the Windows Start button    2  Select Printers and Faxes    3  Select your printer driver icon    4  Right click on the printer driver icon and select  Printing Preferences    5  Change the settings on each tab  click OK        15  Basic Printing    Layout Tab    The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  appears on the printed page  The Layout Options includes  Multiple Pages per Side  Poster Printing and Booklet  Printing  See    Printing a Document    o
13.     b  Configure an IP address  subnet mask  and gateway for the  printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP  address for the network printer    c  Click Next     You can also set the network printer via SyncThruTM Web  Service  an embedded web server  Click Launch SWS on  Set IP Address window  Your machine   s embedded website  opens        6 Select the components to be installed  After selecting the  components  the following window appears  You can also  change the printer name  set the printer to be shared on    Installing Printer Software in Windows    the network  set the printer as the default printer  and          change the port name of each printer  Click Next           a i Reinstalling Printer Software   X      Ae  You can reinstall the software if installation fails     an 1 Start Windows        Change printer settings to be installed       Default Printer Shared Name     2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs      your printer driver name     Maintenance   3 Select Repair and click Next   4          f          C1  AA GG re ieck on h   The list of printers available on the network appears     tee ee ee Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  click Next           T Setting up this printer on a server Pal  63     Next gt  Cancel   Select Printer Port am       Select a port that will be used for your printer                NG TCP IP Port  To install this software on a server  select the Setting up    Shared Prin
14.     e The machine is in power save mode  When  data is received  or any button is pressed  it  switches to on line automatically        Green  Blinking When the green LED slowly blinks  the  machine is receiving data from the computer     When the green LED slowly rapidly  the    machine is printing data        On e The machine is powered on and can be used        Red Blinking    A minor error has occurred and the machine is  waiting for the error to be cleared  Check the  display message  and solve the problem  referring to  Understanding display  messages  on page 78       Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge   The estimated cartridge life of toner is close   Prepare a new cartridge for replacement  You  may temporarily increase the printing quality  by redistributing the toner   See   Redistributing toner  on page 66         On      A problem has occurred such as a paper jam   cover is open or no paper in the tray  so that  the machine cannot continue the job  Check  the message on the display  and refer to   Understanding display messages  on  page 78 to solve the problem       Atoner cartridge has almost reached its  estimated cartridge life  It is recommended to  replace the toner cartridge   See  Replacing  the toner cartridge  on page 67               1g Always check the message on the display to solve the problem  The  instruction in the Troubleshooting section will guide you to operate the  machine properly  See  Understanding display messages  on page 78 
15.    Introduction_ 23    SUPPLIED SOFTWARE       You must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied CD  after you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer  CD  provides you with the following software        CD    CONTENTS       Printer Windows    software CD    Printer driver  Use this driver to take full  advantage of your printer s features   Postscript Printer Description  PPD   file  Use the PostScript driver to print  documents with complex fonts and  graphics in the PS language    Scanner driver  TWAIN and Windows  Image Acquisition  WIA  drivers are  available for scanning documents on  your machine    Smart Panel  This program allows you to  monitor the machine s status and alerts    you when an error occurs during printing     SmarThru Office     This is the  accompanying Windows based software  for your multifunctional machine    Direct Printing Utility  This program  allows you to print PDF files directly   SetIP  Use this program to set your  machine s TCP IP addresses        Linux    Postscript Printer Description  PPD   file  Use this file to run your machine  from a Linux computer and print  documents    SANE  Use this driver to scan  documents    Smart Panel  This program allows you  to monitor the machine s status and  alerts you when an error occurs during  printing        Macintosh          Printer driver  Use this driver to take  full advantage of your printer s  features    Postscript Printer Description  PPD   file  Use
16.    NOTE  If you want to cancel the scan job  click Cancel           Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office       NOTE  Before beginning uninstallation  ensure that all  applications are closed on your computer        1 From the Start menu  select Programs     2 Select SmarThru Office  and then select Uninstall  SmarThru Office     3 When your computer asks you to confirm  read the  statement and click OK     4  Click Finish     Using Onscreen Help File    For more information about SmarThru  click   at the top right  corner of the window  The SmarThru Help window opens and  allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru  program        Scanning Process with TWAIN   enabled Software    If you want to scan documents using other software  you will  need to use TWAIN compliant software  such as Adobe  Photoshop  The first time you scan with your machine  select it  as your TWAIN source in the application you use     The basic scanning process involves a number of steps    1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  and properly connected to each other    2 Load the document s  face up into the DADF  or ADF    OR    Place a single document face down on the document  glass     3 Open an application  such as Photoshop   4 Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options   5 Scan and save your scanned image        NOTE  You need to follow the program   s instructions for  acquiring an image  Please refer to the user   s guide of the  application        Scanning  
17.    Replace the toner  cartridge for the best  print quality when this  message appears  Using  a cartridge beyond this  stage can result in  printing quality issues   See page 67    If the black toner   NG cartridge is  empty  Black  Only message    does not appear        SUGGESTED  MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS  Toner Low Small amount of toner   Prepare a new cartridge  v is left in the cartridge    for replacement  You  The estimated may temporarily  cartridge life of toner increase the printing  is close  quality by redistributing  the toner   See page 66    Tray 2 Paper has jammed In   Clear the jam  See page  Paper jam 0 the paper feed area        Updating Data  Please Wait          This message  appears when there is  a change in the  system setting or  when you back up a  data        Do not turn the power off  when this message is  showing  Changes may  not be saved and datas  can be lost           Toner Exhausted  h         A toner cartridge has  reached its estimated  cartridge life  The  printer stops printing   7  Estimated  Z cartridge life  means the  expected or  estimated  toner cartridge  life  which  indicates the  average capacity of  print outs and is  designed pursuant to  ISO IEC 19798   See  Specification on page  99   The number of  pages may be  affected by operating  environment  printing  interval  media type   and media size  Some  amount of toner may  remain in the cartridge  even when  Toner  Exhausted  appears  and the printer stops  printing        
18.    The certificate window appears  click Trust     Click    in the SetlP window to open the TCP IP  configuration window        UU AW N    mask  default gateway  and then click Apply   when you enter the MAC address  enter it without colon        The machine prints the network information  Confirm all  the settings are correct   8 Close the SetIP program     Ng    Open the Library folder     Printers     Samsung     Your    Enter the network card s MAC address  IP address  subnet    42          Setting Up the Printer  Set up for your printer will be different depending on which    cable you use to connect the printer to your computer  the  network cable or the USB cable     For a Network connected Macintosh       NOTE  Some printers do not support a network interface   Before connecting your printer  make sure that your  printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer  Specifications in your Printer User s Guide        1 Follow the instructions on    Installing Software    on page 41  to install the PPD file on your computer     2 Open the Applications folder     Utilities  and Print  Setup Utility   For MAC OS 10 5  open System Preferences from the  Applications folder  and click Printer  amp  Fax   3 Click Add on the Printer List     e For MAC OS 10 5  press the         icon then a display  window will pop up   4 For MAC OS 10 3  select the Rendezvous tab   e For MAC OS 10 4  click Default Browser and find the  Bonjour   e For MAC OS 10 5  click Default and fin
19.    This is not a problem  Just  keep printing        AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc       AaBbCc          The machine  does not print  special sized  paper such as a  billing paper        Paper size and  paper size setting do  not match     Set the correct paper size in  the Custom in the Paper tab  in the printer propeties  See  Software section           Printing quality problems    If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly   you may notice a reduction in print quality  See the table below to clear the                            problem   CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  Light or faded print   If a vertical white streak or faded area appears  on the page   Aa Cc    The toner supply is low  You may be able  to temporarily extend the toner cartridge  AaBbCc life  See page 66  If this does not improve  AaBbCc the print quality  install a new toner  cartridge   Aa Cc    The paper may not meet paper  Aa Cc specifications  for example  the paper is too  moist or too rough  See page 33       If the entire page is light  the print  resolution setting is too low  Adjust the print  resolution  See the help screen of the  printer driver      Acombination of faded or smeared defects  may indicate that the toner cartridge needs  cleaning    e The surface of the LSU part inside the  machine may be dirty  Clean the LSU   contact a service representative    Toner specks    The paper may not meet specifications  for  example  the paper is too moist or too   AaB
20.    sy Unified Linux Driver Installer       Welcome to the Unified Linux Driver  installation wizard     This program will install all necessary software  for printers and MFP devices   Click Next to continue with the Setup program           Help   Next  gt  Cancel          5 When the installation is complete  click Finish     EF Unified Linux Driver Installer    Unified Linux Driver is installed   Please  re logon your system for all the installation settings to take effect     m User Registration                                 Do you want to register yourself as user of the  printer MFP model you iust installed    Being registered you will gain access to various  services    X  Yes    want to be registered as user               Help     Binish            The installation program has added the Unified Driver  Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver  group to the system menu for your convenience  If you  have any difficulties  consult the onscreen help that is  available through your system menu or can otherwise be  called from the driver package windows applications   such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image  Manager        NOTE  Installing the driver in the text mode     e If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the  driver installation  you have to use the driver in the text  mode    e Follow the step 1 to 3  then type  root localhost Linux       install sh  then follow the instruction on the terminal screen   Then the installation complet
21.   29          Scanning Using the WIA Driver    Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition   WIA  driver for scanning images  WIA is one of the standard  components provided by Microsoft   Windows   XP and works  with digital cameras and scanners  Unlike the TWAIN driver   the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images  without using additional software        NOTE  The WIA driver works only on Windows XP Vista with  USB port        Windows XP    1 Load the document s  face up into the DADF  or ADF     OR   Place a single document face down on the document glass   2 From the Start menu on your desktop window  select    Settings  Control Panel  and then Scanners and  Cameras     Double click your scanner driver icon  The Scanner and  Camera Wizard launches    Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  see how your preferences affect the picture    Click Next    Enter a picture name  and select a file format and  destination to save the picture    Follow the on screen instructions to edit the picture after it  is copied to your computer     Windows Vista    vn ow A   U    1 Load the document s  face up into the DADF  or ADF    OR  Place a single document face down on the document glass     2 Click Start   Control Panel   Hardware and Sound  gt   Scanners and Cameras     3 Click on Scan a document or picture  Then Windows  Fax and Scan application is opened automatically        NOTE    e To view scanners  user can click on View scanners a
22.   Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  loading originals        2  Load the original face up into the DADF  or ADF   Make sure that the  bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the  document input tray        3  Adjust the document width guides to the paper size        Z Dust on the DADF  or ADF  glass may cause black lines on the  printout  Always keep it clean        SELECTING PRINT MEDIA       You can print on a variety of print media  such as plain paper  envelopes    labels  and transparencies  Always use print media that meet the guidelines   for use with your machine  Print media that does not meet the guidelines   outlined in this user   s guide may cause the following problems    e Poor print quality   e Increased paper jams   e Premature wear on the machine    Properties  such as weight  composition  grain  and moisture content  are   important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output   quality  When you choose print materials  consider the following    e The type  size and weight of the print media for your machine are  described later in this section    e Desired outcome  The print media you choose should be appropriate for  your project    e Brightness  Some print media are whiter than others and produce  sharper  more vibrant images    e Surface smoothness  The smoothness of the print media affects how  crisp the printing looks on the paper     NG    Some print media may meet all of the g
23.   Friction pad  Multi purpose tray   FCF  Optional tray 2     Approx  70 000 pages          a  First cassette feeder  Tray1     We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized  service provider  dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine  The  warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after  their lifespan     Checking replaceables    If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems  check the  number of pages the machine has printed or scanned  Replace the  corresponding parts  if necessary     1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK    4  Press the left right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK   e Supplies Info  Prints the supply information page   e Total  Displays the total number of pages printed   e ADF Scan  Displays the number of pages scanned using the ADF     e Platen Scan  Displays the number of pages scanned using the  scanner glass     e Transfer Belt  Fuser  Tray1 Roller  Tray2 Roller  MP Tray  Roller  Displays the number of pages printed each item   5  If you selected to print a supply information page  press OK to confirm   6  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Maintenance 69    Replacing the DADF  or ADF  rubber pad    You will need to replace the DADF  or ADF  rubber pad 
24.   If your printer is not connected to the network  the    following window will appear  Select a setup option you want   click Next     No printer was found on the network    Pbansunag    Verify that the printer is properly connected with wired network cable and turned on before  proceeding installation     Select a setup option below        Selecting this option will allow you to configure IP settings for your printer and install the printer on  your PC     C Wireless settings on printer    Selecting this option will allow you to configure IP and Wireless settings for your printer and install  the printer on your PC           Then    the Set IP Address window appears  Do as follows           Set IP Address       You can set or change IP address for the network printer             si             o  Information Update  Printer MAC Address    IP Address   F      Configure  Subnet Mask   3 2     Default Gateway   x          1 Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the    list     Installing Printer Software in Windows    2 Configure an IP address  subnet mask  and gateway for the  printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP  address for the network printer              3 Click Next  and go to step 6              You can also set the network printer via SyncThruTM Web  Service  an embedded web server  Click Launch SWS on  Set I P Address window  Your machine   s embedded  website opens          5 The list of printers available on the network ap
25.   Index  A    accessories    installing  hard disk 96  wireless network interface card    Address Book  group dial numbers 58  speed buttons 57  speed dial numbers 57    Address Book  use 48   ADF 19   ADF rubber pad  replace 69  ADF  load 32    adjustment  altitude 28    alarm sound 29  Ans Fax mode  receiving mode 53    C  characters  enter 29    cleaning  inside 63  outside 63  scan unit 65    clock mode 29  collation  special copy 40  control panel 20    copying  2 up  4 up 40  book 41  clone 41  collation 40  darkness 39  default setting  change 40  edge erase 42  ID card copy 40  margin shift 41  original type 39  poster 41  time out  set 42    D   date and time  set 29  default mode  change 29  delayed fax 54    106 Index    demo page  print 25  display language  change 28    driver  installation 27    DRPD  Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection   53    E    edge erase  special copy 42    F  fax header  set 51  Fax mode  receiving mode 53  fax number  set 51    faxing  default settings  change 57  delayed faxes 54  fax setup 56  forwarding faxes 55  Multiple Send faxes 54  priority faxes 55  receiving faxes 52  sending faxes 52    Forwarding 55    G    Group dial numbers  set 58    H    hard disk  installing 96  use 97       ID card  special copy 40  ID copy 20  21    installing accessories  hard disk 96  network interface card 94    J   jam  clearing paper from the tray1 73  tips for avoiding paper jams 71    jam  clear  document 71    job timeout  set 30    K  key sound
26.   OK   If you entered a new speed dial number  Add  appears   If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group  Delete   appears    5  Press OK to add or delete the number    6  Press OK when Yes appears to add or delete more numbers and  repeat steps 4 and 5    7  When you have finished  press the left right arrow to select No at the  Another No   prompt and press OK     58 Faxing       8  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Using group dial numbers    To use a group dial entry  you need to search for and select it from  memory     When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax   press Address Book  See below    Searching Address Book for an entry   There are two ways to search for a number in memory  You can either  scan from A to Z sequentially  or you can search by entering the first  letters of the name associated with the number    Searching sequentially through the memory   1  If necessary  press Fax     2  Press Address Book until Search  amp  Dial appears on the bottom line  of the display and press OK     3  Press the left right arrow until the number category you want  appears and press OK     4  Press OK when All appears     5  Press the left right arrow until the name and number you want  appears  You can search upwards or downwards through the entire  memory in alphabetical order     Searching with a particular first letter  1  If necessary  press Fax     2  Press Address Book until Search  amp  Dial appears on the bottom line  of t
27.   Reenter the correct password     To print a file immediately    You can print a job scheduled to be printed at a specified time   immediately  In this case  the job currently printing is stopped and the   selected job will be printed  This function is available when the job is  scheduled for later printing    1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK    4  Press the left right arrow until the user   s name and file name you  want appear and press OK    5  If the select file is a confidential print job  enter the specified 4 digit  password    Press the left right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK  The  cursor automatically moves to the next digit position  Enter the 2nd   3rd  and 4th digit in the same way    6  Press the left right arrow until Release appears and press OK   This option appears only when you select a Delay print job  See  page 97    If you enter the incorrect password  Invalid Password appears   Reenter the correct password     Printing using the form files    You can store up to 10 form files in the hard disk and make them printed  with your document     First  you need to create a form file using the printer driver  See the  Software section     1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK     2  Press the 
28.   Secure Receive Send Report DRPD Mode Adjust Bkgd  Original Type Scan Format SMB  Add Page Image TCR Duplex Print Book Copy  E mail Scan Size  Cancel Job Dial Mode Change Default Margin Shift Scan Size Original Type  Receiving Resolution Edge Erase Original Type Resolution  Receive Mode Darkness Gray Enhance Resolution Scan Color  Ring to Answer Auto Report Scan Color       Network       System Setup             System Setup                               System Setup Scan Setup     Continued   Continued    TCP IP Clear Setting Report Machine Setup Change Default  Ethernet Speed All Settings All Report Machine ID USB Memory  Wireless Fax Setup Configuration Machine Fax No  E mail  Clear Setting Copy Setup Supplies Info Date  amp  Time FTP  Network Info Scan Setup Address Book Clock Mode SMB   System Setup Send Report Form Menu Send Report   Network Setup Sent Report Select Form   Address Book Fax RCV Report Language   Sent Report Schedule Jobs Default Mode   Fax RCV Report JunkFax Report Power Save   NetScan Report Network Info  Scan PWR Save   Job Manage NetScan Report Timeout   Active Job User Auth List Job Timeout   Store Job PCL Font List Altitude Adj    File Policy PS3 Font List Auto Continue   ImageOverwrite Stored Job Net Accounting  Immediate Completed Job Import Setting  On Demand Net Auth Log Export Setting  Maintenance Paper Setup  Supplies Life Paper Size  Color Paper Type    Serial Number    Paper Source    Sound Volume    Key Sound  Alarm Sound  Speaker  Ringer 
29.   See page  66    e Parts of the machine may have toner on  them  If the defects occur on the back of  the page  the problem will likely correct  itself after a few more pages      The fusing assembly may be damaged   Contact a service representative     Page skew                Ensure that the paper is loaded properly   Check the paper type and quality  See page  33    Ensure that the paper or other material is  loaded correctly and the guides are not too  tight or too loose against the paper stack           Ensure that the paper is loaded properly   Check the paper type and quality  Both high  temperature and humidity can cause paper  curl  See page 33    Turn over the stack of paper in the tray  Also  try rotating the paper 180   in the tray           Background scatter                   Background scatter results from bits of toner   randomly distributed on the printed page      The paper may be too damp  Try printing  with a different batch of paper  Do not open  packages of paper until necessary so that  the paper does not absorb too much  moisture       If background scatter occurs on an  envelope  change the printing layout to  avoid printing over areas that have  overlapping seams on the reverse side   Printing on seams can cause problems       If background scatter covers the entire  surface area of a printed page  adjust the  print resolution through your software  application or the printer properties     AaBbCc          Ensure that the paper is loaded properly   
30.   Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners    Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the  parallel port or USB port  Since the MFP device contains more  than one device  printer and scanner   it is necessary to  organize proper access of    consumer    applications to these  devices via the single I O port     The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an  appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung  printer and scanner drivers  The drivers address their devices  Via so called MFP ports  The current status of any MFP port can  be viewed via the Ports Configuration  The port sharing  prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP  device  while another block is in use     When you install a new MFP device onto your system  it is  strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an  Unified Driver Configurator  In this case you will be asked to  choose I O port for the new device  This choice will provide the  most suitable configuration for MFP s functionality  For MFP  scanners   O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers  automatically  so proper settings are applied by default           Configuring Printer Properties    Using the properties window provided by the Printers  configuration  you can change the various properties for your  machine as a printer     1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator     If necessary  switch to Printers configuration   2 Select your machine on the available printers list and click  Pr
31.   UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com    kz ru  VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com   latin  VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com vn             Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 109      2008 Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd  All rights reserved   This user s guide is provided for information purposes only  All information included herein is subject to change without notice   Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages  arising from or related to use of this user s guide           e Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd    e PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company    e Microsoft  Windows  and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation   e PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System  Inc    e UFST   and MicroType    are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc    e TrueType  LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer  Inc       All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations        Rev  3 00    Samsung Printer       Software section    SOFTWARE SECTION    CONTENTS    Chapter 1  INSTALLING PRINTER SOFTWARE IN WINDOWS    Installing Printer SoftWare paa ANS AA NA AA BALA BAGAKAY NANANG AN 5  Installing Software for Local Printing                  m agawan etree kn KaN 5  Installing Software for Network Printing              2  aaaaa unawa naa ba NANG N NG GAAN A NANG N NN tratt NAGA KN 
32.   Using Your Printer with a Macintosh          Using Seti P program    This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC  address which is the hardware serial number of the network  printer card or interface  Especially  it is for the network  administrator to set several network IPs at the same time     You can only use Setli P program when your machine is    connected to a network     SetIP program should be automatically installed during the  printer driver installation        NOTE  If you select Typical installation for a network  printer during the printer driver installation  the SetIP  program automatically runs after the installation  Follow the  below instruction        1 The certificate window appears  click Trust     2 Print the machine s network information report which  includes your machine s MAC address     3 Click Kk in the SetIP window to open the TCP IP  configuration window     4 Enter the network card s MAC address  IP address  subnet    mask  default gateway  and then click Apply        NOTE  when you enter the MAC address  enter it without  colon           5 The machine prints the network information  Confirm all  the settings are correct   6 Close the SetIP program     Starting the program    If you want to change your network printer IP setting  follow    the below instruction   1 Print the machine s network information report which  includes your machine   s MAC address     printer model name     Seti P   Double click the Seti PApplet html file
33.   allows you to set image options that are used  when printing images  files  such as color options  image  size  or image position     Device  allows you to set the print resolution  paper  source  and destination    5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties  window    6 Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing    7 The Printing window appears  allowing you to monitor the  status of your print job     To abort the current job  click Cancel     Printing Files   You can print many different types of files on the Samsung   machine device using the standard CUPS way   directly from   the command line interface  The CUPS Ipr utility allows you do   that  But the drivers package replaces the standard Ipr tool by   a much more user friendly LPR GUI program    To print any document file    1 Type lpr  lt file_ name gt  from the Linux shell command  line and press Enter  The LPR GUI window appears     When you type only lpr and press Enter  the Select    file s  to print window appears first  J ust select any files  you want to print and click Open     2 Inthe LPR GUI window  select your printer from the list   and change the printer and print job properties   For details about the properties window  see page 37   3 Click OK to start printing     38  Using Your Printer in Linux          Scanning a Document    You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator  window     1    2  3    uk    Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your  desk
34.   appears and press OK     8  Press OK  Printing starts     Deleting a stored job   You can delete jobs currently stored in the hard disk    1  Press Menu  27  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Store Job appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the user s name and file name you  want appear and press OK     5  If the select file is a confidential print job  enter the specified 4 digit  password   Press the left right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK  The  cursor automatically moves to the next digit position  Enter the 2nd   3rd  and 4th digit in the same way    6  Press the left right arrow until Delete appears and press OK     If you enter the incorrect password  Invalid Password appears   Reenter the correct password     7  When Yes appears  press OK     Controlling the active job queue    All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the Active Job  Queue in the order you sent them to the printer  You can delete a job  from the queue before printing  or promote a job to print sooner     To delete a file from the queue    1  Press Menu  f3  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK     4  Press the left right a
35.   envelopes  and labels before loading  them into the multi purpose tray     1  Hold the handle of multi purpose tray and pull it down to open        2  Load the paper        L  e Ifyou want to load the used paper  place the paper with the  printed side facing down   e If you are using paper  flex or fan the edge of the paper stack  to separate the pages before loading           3  Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to  the width of the paper  Do not force too much  or the paper will be bent   which will result in a paper jam or skew         IZ Depending on the media type you are using  keep the following  loading guidelines     Envelopes  Flap side down and with the stamp area on the  top left side    Labels  Print side up and top short edge entering the machine  first    Preprinted paper  Design side up with the top edge toward the  machine    Card stock  Print side up and the short edge entering the  machine first    Previously printed paper  Previously printed side down with  an uncurled edge toward the machine     4  After loading paper  set the paper type and size for the multi purpose  tray  See Software section for PC printing     L  The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on  the control panel     5  After printing  close the multi purpose tray     Loading originals and print media_ 37    ADJUSTING THE OUTPUT SUPPORT       The printed pages stack on the output tray  and the output support will help  the printed p
36.   fax numbers  You will be able to enter a fax number with the touch of a  button  By utilizing the Shift button  you can store up to 30 numbers on  the speed buttons     There are two ways to assign numbers to speed buttons  Examine the  procedures below and use the appropriate way which you prefer   Registering after pressing a speed button  1  Press Fax   2  Press one of the speed buttons   3  Press OK when Yes appears   4  Enter the name you want and press OK    For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters  see page 29   5  Enter the fax number you want to store and press OK     Registering after entering a number first   1  Press Fax    2  Enter the fax number you want to store    3  Press one of the speed buttons    4  Press OK when Yes appears    Z If you press a speed button already assigned  the display asks if  you want to overwrite  Press OK to confirm Yes and continue  To  start over with another speed button  select No    5  Enter the name you want and press OK    For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters  see page 29    6  Press OK to confirm the number     Using speed buttons    When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax      To retrieve a number from speed buttons 1 to 15  press the  corresponding speed button and press OK      To retrieve a number from speed buttons 16 to 30  press Shift and  then the corresponding speed button  and press OK     Speed dial numbers   You can store up to 240 frequently used fax numbers in s
37.   maman    aga       Ng Cocumerts m nase    a                      Peasy        Tool bar  Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate  the certain functions such as Scan  Search  etc     eWorking area      SmarThru Desktop  Created within the standard  Windows folder My Documents       Sort on Disk  Files of the folders which are not  indexed will not be displayed in the Sort on Disk  section  Sort type are Date  File Types  Latest Used   To add a folder for indexing  press Edit menu  gt   Preferences   Index    It may take longer time to show the added file folders  according to the computer performance and the  number of added file folders        NOTE    e To do indexing and searching the PDF format file  you must  install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7 0 5 or higher    e You can use indexing and searching functions using  SmarThru Office supported by Microsoft Indexing Service   This service is supported in Windows 2000 or above          Windows Folders  Allow user to navigate through all  the user   s files and folders       The right panel  Reflects the content of a selected  folder      Send to bar  Run the corresponding application directly   Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate  application button       Send by E mail  To send documents by E mail while  working within the SmarThru Office   To send scanned images or documents by e mail  you  must have a mail client program  like Outlook Express   which has been set up with your e mail account      Send by FTP  T
38.   print job  The Download as bit image setting is often useful  when printing Adobe  This feature is available only  when you use the PCL 6 printer driver      Download as Bitmap  When this option is selected  the  driver will download the font data as bitmap images   Documents with complicated fonts  such as Korean or  Chinese  or various other fonts  will print faster in this  setting  This feature is available only when you use  the PCL 6 printer driver      Print as Graphics  When this option is selected  the driver  will download any fonts as graphics  When printing documents  with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts   printing performance  speed  may be enhanced in this  setting  This feature is available only when you use  the PCL 6 printer driver    Print All Text To Black  When the Print All Text To   Black option is checked  all text in your document prints solid   black  regardless of the color it appears on the screen    Print All Text To Darken  When the Print All Text To   Darken option is checked  all text in your document is allowed   to print darker than on a normal document   CLX 6200ND    CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX only     Grayscale Enhancement  Press the Smart Color tab  It   allows users to preserve the details of nature photos  and   improve contrast and readability among gray scaled  colors  when printing color documents in grayscale    Fine Edge  Press the Smart Color tab  It allows users to   emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for
39.   the color mode is decided as  customized  See    Customizing Scan to USB    on page 60   Otherwise  press the left right arrow to select No and press OK   After scanning is complete  you can remove the USB memory device from  the machine     Customizing Scan to USB   You can specify image size  file format  or color mode for each scanning to   USB job    1  Press Scan Email    2  Press Menu  f5  until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    3  Press OK when USB Memory appears    4  Press the left right arrow until the setting option you want appears and  press OK    You can set the following options    e Scan Size  Sets the image size    e Original Type  Sets the original document s type    e Resolution  Sets the image resolution    e Scan Color  Sets the color mode  If you select Mono in this option   you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format    e Scan Format  Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved   When you select TIFF or PDF  you can select to scan multiple  pages  If you select JPEG in this option  you cannot select Mono in  Scan Color     5  Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK     6  Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options   7  When you have finished  press Stop Clear to return to ready mode   You can change the default scan settings  For details  see page 47     PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE       You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device  You can print  TI
40.   to the onscreen help          40  Using Your Printer in Linux    10 Using Your Printer with    a Macintosh      Your printer supports Macintosh systems with a built in USB   interface or 10 100 Base TX network interface card  When you  print a file from a Macintosh computer  you can use the driver by    installing the PPD file           NOTE  Some printers do not support a network  interface  Make sure that your printer supports a  network interface by referring to Printer Specifications  in your Printer User s Guide              l     This chapter includes   e Installing Software  e Uninstalling software  e Using Seti P program i  e Setting Up the Printer  e Printing i       e Scanning       Installing Software      The CD ROM that came with your printer provides you with the  PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple  LaserWriter driver  only available when you use a printer  which supports the PostScript driver   for printing on a  Macintosh computer    Also  it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a  Macintosh computer     Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer       Turn on your computer and printer     Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the    CD ROM drive    Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your  Macintosh desktop    Double click the MAC_ Installer folder    Double click the I nstaller icon    Enter the password and click OK    The Samsung Installer window opens  Click Continue  Select Easy Instal
41.   will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the    installation    e The installation window that appears in this User s  Guide may differ depending on the printer and  interface in use        5 After the installation is finished  a window asking you to    print a test page appears  If you choose to print a test  page  select the checkbox and click Next     Otherwise  just click Next and skip to step 7     6 If the test page prints out correctly  click Yes     If not  click No to reprint it     7 To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to  receive information from Samsung  select the checkbox and    click Finish  You are now sent to the Samsung web site     Otherwise  just click Finish           Setup Completed    On line Registration  You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips  and promotions  Also you will get more customer care      Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership                          NOTE  After setup is complete  if your printer driver doesn t    work properly  reinstall the printer driver  See    Reinstalling  Printer Software    on page 11           6    Custom Installation    You can choose individual components to install     1    2    Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  and powered on     Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive     The CD ROM should automatically run  and an installation  window appears    If the installation win
42.  1  Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in     Activating secure receiving mode       2  Press the left right arrow until Off appears and press OK    3  Enter the four digit password and press OK   The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in  memory    4  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Receiving faxes in memory   Since your machine is a multi tasking device  it can receive faxes while you  are making copies or printing  If you receive a fax while you are copying or  printing  your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory  Then  as soon  as you finish copying or printing  the machine automatically prints the fax   Also  your machine receives faxes and stores them in its memory when  there is no paper in the tray or no toner in the installed toner cartridge     OTHER WAYS TO FAX       Sending a fax to multiple destinations   You can use the Multiple Send feature  which allows you to send a fax to   multiple locations  Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to   a remote station  After transmission  the originals are automatically erased   from memory  You cannot send a color fax using this feature    1  Press Fax    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original  face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32    3  Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs  See  page 51    4  Press Menu  23  until Fax Featur
43.  2  Press the left right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until WLAN Default appears and press OK     4  When Restore appears on the bottom line of the display  press OK   The machine starts restoring the default values     USING THE HARD DISK       Installing the hard disk allows the data from your computer to be sent to the  print queue of the printer hard disk  This decreases the workload of the  computer  You can also use various print features  such as storing a job in  the hard disk  proofing a job  and printing private documents     Installing the hard disk    For order information  see  Accessories  on page 91  Review the  precautions on page 93     1  Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine   2  Release the screws and remove the rear cover        96 Installing accessories          3  Open the control board cover  Release the screws  then lift up the cover  slightly and pull the cover to the right        1 control board  cover          4  Align the connector on the hard disk with the connector on the control  board  Push the hard disk in until it is latched into place       7  Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw     8   9     Reconnect the power cord and printer cable  and turn the machine on     Print a configuration page from the control panel to check if the hard disk  is correctly installed  See page 62     Setting the hard disk in the printer properties    After installing the ha
44.  29    L    LED  Status 22    Linux problems 88    loading originals  ADF 32  scanner glass 32    M  machine ID  set 51    Maintenance  maintenance parts 69  toner cartridge 65    margin shift  special copy 41    memory module  installing 93  ordering 91    memory  clear 63  Multiple Sned faxes 54    N    network  setting up 25    network interface card  install 94    O  optional tray 69  91    originals  jam  clear 71  loading 32    paper  changing the size 36  clearing jam 73  loading in the multi purpose tray 37  loading in the optional tray 36  loading in the tray1 36    paper tray  set  copy 39  fax 52    paper type  setting 38    PostScript  problems 87    power save mode 30  print quality problems  solve 83    printing  demo page 25  reports 62  USB memory 60    priority fax 55    problem  solve  copying 85  faxing 86  Linux 88  Network Scan 86  paper feeding 81  printing quality 83  scanning 86  Windows 87    R    receiving a fax  in Ans Fax mode 53  in DRPD mode 53  in Fax mode 53  in Secure Receiving mode 53  in Tel mode 53  in the memory 49    receiving modes 52    redialing  automatically 52  manually 52    replacing  ADF rubber pad 69    replacing components  toner cartridge 66    replacing  toner cartridge 67  reports  print 62  ringer 29    scan power save mode 30    scanner glass    cleaning 65  loading documents 32    scanning  default setting  change 47  to email 46  to FTP server 47  to SMB server 47  USB flash memory 59    secure receiving mode 53    sendi
45.  4  MH is a codebook   based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress  white space  As most faxes consist mostly of white space  this  minimizes the transmission time of most faxes     MMR    Modified Modified READ  MMR  is a compression method  recommended by ITU T T 6     Modem    A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information   and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted  information     MR    Modified Read  MR  is a compression method recommended by ITU T  T 4  MR encodes the first scanned line using MH  The next line is  compared to the first  the differences determined  and then the  differences are encoded and transmitted     NetWare    A network operating system developed by Novell  Inc  It initially used  cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC  and the  network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack   Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX     OPC    Organic Photo Conductor  OPC  is a mechanism that makes a virtual  image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer  and it is  usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped     An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the  printer  and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches  from grits of a paper     Originals   The first example of something  such as a document  photograph or text   etc  which is copied  reproduced or translated to produce others  b
46.  5  Press OK after setting is done     bad    Scanning to application programs   1  Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly  connected to each other    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original  face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32    3  Press Scan Email   Ready to Scan appears on the top line of the display    4  Press the left right arrow until Scan to PC appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK     5  Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears and press  OK     6  Depending on the port connection  different massages appear  Check  the following messages and move on to the next step     e Scan Destination  Connected by USB  Move to step 7    e ID  Connected by Network and user is registered  Move to step 6   e dLocal PC  gt   Choosing USB or Network to scan  If connected by  USB  move to step 5  If connected by Network  move to step 6    e Not Available  Neither connected by USB nor Network  Check the   port connection     7  Press the left right arrow until the port you want appears on the display   8  Enter the registered user ID and PIN and click OK   L  e IDis the same ID as the registered ID for Samsung Scan  Manager   e PIN is the 4 digit number registered for Samsung Scan  Manager     9  From Scan Destination  press the left right arrow until the application  program you want appears  then press OK   Default setting is My Docu
47.  Address  Book  See page 58   Group dial numbers    If you frequently send the same document to several destinations  you  can group these destinations and set them under a group dial number   You can then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the  destinations within the group  You can set up to 200  0 through 199   group dial numbers using the destination   s existing speed dial numbers   Registering a group dial number   1  Press Fax     2  Press Address Book until New  amp  Edit appears on the bottom line of   the display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK    Enter a group dial number between 0 and 199 and press OK    Enter a speed dial number and press OK    Press OK when speed dial information appears correctly    Press OK when Yes appears    Repeat steps 5 and 6 to include other speed dial numbers into the   group    9  When you have finished  press the left right arrow to select No at the  Another No   prompt and press OK     10  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     PN Pp  amp     Editing a group dial number    You can delete a specific entry from a group or add a new number to the  selected group     1  Press Address Book until New  amp  Edit appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK     2  Press the left right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK    3  Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK    4  Enter the speed dial number you want to add or delete and press
48.  Advanced Printing    23    Using a Page Overlay    After an overlay has been created  it is ready to be printed with  your document  To print an overlay with a document     1  2    Create or open the document you want to print     To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    Click the Extras tab     Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop down  list box    If the overlay file you want does not appear in the  Overlay list  click Edit button and Load Overlay  and  select the overlay file     If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  external source  you can also load the file when you access  the Load Overlay window     After you select the file  click Open  The file appears in the  Overlay List box and is available for printing  Select the  overlay from the Overlay List box    If necessary  click Confirm Page Overlay When  Printing  If this box is checked  a message window  appears each time you submit a document for printing   asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on  your document     If this box is not checked and an overlay has been  selected  the overlay automatically prints with your  document     Click OK or Yes until printing begins     The selected overlay downloads with your print job and  prints on your document        NOTE  The resolution of the overlay document must be the  same as that of the document you will print with the overlay   
49.  Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock    e Never manually rotate the drum  especially in the reverse direction  this  can cause internal damage and toner spillage     Use of Non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge    Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non   Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic  store    brand  refilled  or remanufactured toner cartridges     A e Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the  machine caused by the use of a refilled  remanufactured  or non   Samsung brand toner cartridge     Estimated cartridge life    Estimated cartridge life  the life of the toner cartridge yield  depends on the  amount of toner that print jobs require  The actual print out number may  vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on  operating  environment  printing interval  media type  and or media size  For example   if you print a lot of graphics  the consumption of the toner is high and you  may need to change the cartridge more often     Maintenance 65    Redistributing toner   When a toner is low  faded or light areas may appear  It is possible that   colored images may be printed with incorrect colors due to flawed mixing of   toner colors when one of the colored toner cartridges is low on toner  You   can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner    e The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on  the display      The Sma
50.  For other Windows 5 Check the Sh thi inter b  OS  refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online EO IS AMAKS EMS Priest DOK   help  6 Fill in the Shared Name field  and then click OK        e Check the Operating System s  that are compatible with          your printer  Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of  Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide       If you need to know the exact name of your printer  you can  check the supplied CD ROM     Setting Up a Client Computer    1 Right click the Windows Start button and select Explore    2 Select My Network Places and then right click Search  for Computers    3 Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name  field  and click Search   In case host computer requires  User name and Password  fill in User ID and password  of host computer account      Double click Printers and Faxes   Right  click printer driver icon  select Connect   Click Yes  if the installation confirm message appears                                                           NOTE                                                                U A       26  Sharing the Printer Locally    Scanning    Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into  digital files on your computer  Then you can fax or e mail the  files  display them on your web site or use them to create  projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software  or the WIA driver     This chapter includes    e Scanning Using Samsung SmarThr
51.  Gongdan Dong  Gumi City    Gyungbuk  Korea 730 030 TEKS  November  08  2007 Whan Soon Yim   Senior Manager             Representative in the EU              Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab     Blackbushe Business Park P93  i JOEL     Saxony Way  Yateley  Hampshire  GU46 6GG  UK    Yong Sang Park   S  Manager  November  08  2007     Place and date of issue   Name and signature of authorized person                 Safety information_13    contents       14 Contents    INTRODUCTION    GETTING STARTED    LOADING ORIGINALS AND PRINT MEDIA    19  19  19  20  20  21  22  22  23  24  24  24  24    32  32  32  33  34    35  36  36  36  37  38  38    Features of your new laser product  Safety information    Printer overview  Front view  Rear view  Control panel overview  CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only  CLX 6200ND only  Understanding the Status LED  Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge  Menu overview  Supplied software  Printer driver features  Printer driver  PostScript driver    Setting up the hardware   Printing a demo page   Setting up the network  Supported operating environments  Configuring network protocol via the machine  Using the SetIP program   System requirements  Windows  Macintosh  Linux   Installing the software   Machine s basic settings  Altitude adjustment  Changing the display language  Setting the date and time  Changing the clock mode  Changing the default mode  Setting sounds  Entering characters using the number keypad  Using the save modes  
52.  Help File    e For more information about Job Setting  click   at the  top right corner of the window  The J ob Setting Help  window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied  on the J ob Setting        About Tab    Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the  version number of the driver  If you have an Internet browser   you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon   See    Printing a Document    on page 14 for more information  about accessing printer properties     Basic Printing    18    Printer Tab    If you access printer properties through the Printers folder   you can view the Printer tab  You can set the printer  configuration     The following procedure is for Windows XP  For other Windows  OS  refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online  help    Click the Windows Start menu    Select Printers and Faxes    Select your printer driver icon    Right click on the printer driver icon and select  Properties    Click the Printer tab and set the options     uu NAUNA    Using a Favorite Setting    The Favorites option  which is visible on each properties tab   allows you to save the current properties settings for future  use     To save a Favorites item   1 Change the settings as needed on each tab   2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box     Copies  1  Resolution  600 dpi               avorites  Untitled                   Cancel   Apply   Hep    3 Click Save   When you save Favorites  all current d
53.  List entry  This name will be displayed on your machine     DAAN    7  Select IP Address or Host Name   8  Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name   9  Enter the server port number  from 1 to 65535     The default port number is 139    10  Enter the Share name of the server    11  Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit  unauthorized persons to access the SMB server  This box is  unchecked by default    12  Enter the login name and password    13  Enter the domain name of the SMB server    14  Enter the Scan File Folder under shared folder for storing the  scanned image    15  Click Apply     Scanning to Email   You can scan and send an image as an email attachment  You first need to   set up your email account in SyncThru    Web Service  See page 46    Before scanning  you can set the scan options for your scan job  See page   47    1  Make sure that your machine is connected to a network    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original   face down on the scanner glass    For details about loading an original  see page 32    Press Scan Email    4  Press the left right arrow until Scan to Email appears on the bottom line  of the display and press OK    5  Enter the recipient s email address and press OK   If you have set up Address Book  you can use a speed button or a speed email  or group email number to retrieve an address from memory  See page 48    6  To enter additional addresses  press OK when Yes
54.  Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use  of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated  When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices   ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device    Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices  Since your system is equipped with a wireless device  when traveling  between countries with your system  check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of  a wireless device in the destination country    If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device  do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are  in place and the system is fully assembled    Wireless devices are not user serviceable  Do not modify them in any way  Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use  it  Contact manufacturer for service    Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used  See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit  or contact  manufacturer Technical Support for additional information     Safety information_11    OPENSSL LICENSE       Copyright  c  1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project  All rights reserved    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met    1  Redistributions of so
55.  Tel mode  you can receive a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and  then Color Start or Black Start  You can also pick up the handset of  the extension phone and then press the remote receive code  See  page 53    e In Ans Fax mode  an answering machine attached to your machine  answers an incoming call  and the caller can leave a message on the  answering machine  If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line   the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax   See page 53        In DRPD mode  you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring     gt     Pattern Detection  DRPD  feature  Distinctive Ring is a telephone  company service which enables an user to use a single telephone  line to answer several different telephone numbers  For further  details  see page 53    6  Press OK to save your selection    7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     L  e When the memory is full  the printer can no longer receive any  incoming fax  Secure free memory to resume by removing data  stored in the memory    e To use the Ans Fax mode  attach an answering machine to the  EXT socket on the back of your machine    e If you do not want other people to view your received documents   you can use secure receiving mode  In this mode  all of the  received faxes are stored in memory  For further details  see page  53     Receiving automatically in Fax mode    Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory  When you receive a fax   the machine answers the call on a speci
56.  Type       for printer operations will be installed     1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your network    and powered on  For details about connecting to the  network  see the supplied printer s User s Guide     Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive     The CD ROM should automatically run  and an installation    window appears     If the installation window does not appear  click Start and    then Run  Type X   Setup exe  replacing    X    with the  letter which represents your drive and click OK     If you use Windows Vista  click Start     All programs  gt     Accessories     Run  and type X   Setup exe     If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista  click  Run Setup exe in Install or run program field  and  click Continue in the User Account Control window     3 Click Next     x        It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before  running Setup        Select a language from the list below       English zl  Cancel                      e If necessary  select a language from the drop down list        8       Select type that you want and click  Next  button     c Typical installation for a  local printer    Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s  computer    Install software for a device that is on network  Wired or Wireless           Custom installation You can select installation options  This option is recommended for    professional users      lt Back Cancel             NOTE    
57.  USB memory port on your  machine    Press Scan Email    Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display   Press the left right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Format appears and press OK    Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection    Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     NDAAON    Viewing the USB memory status    You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and   saving documents    1  Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  machine    2  Press Scan Email     3  Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display     4  Press the left right arrow until Check Space appears and press OK   The available memory space appears on the display   5  Press Stop Clear to return to the ready mode     Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display        Using USB flash memory 61    maintenance       This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge     This chapter includes     Printing reports   Adjusting the color contrast  Clearing memory   Cleaning your machine  Maintaining the cartridge    PRINTING REPORTS       Your machine can provide various reports with useful information you will   need  The following reports are available    64 Some reports may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine        REPORTILIST DESCRIPTION  
58.  You can set the amount of time a single print job is active before it must  print  The machine handles incoming data as a single job if it comes in within  the specified time  When an error occurs while processing data from the  computer and the data flow stops  the machine waits the specified time and  then cancels printing if data flow does not resume     1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears    3  Press the left right arrow until Job Timeout appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  press OK     5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Auto continue   This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not  in case the   paper size you have set and the paper within the tray mismatches    1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears    3  Press the left right arrow until Auto Continue appears and press OK    4  Press the left right arrow until the binding option you want appears     e On  Automatically prints after set time passes  when the paper size  mismatches the tray paper size     e Off  Waits until you press Black Start or Color Start on the control  panel  when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size   5  Press OK to save your selection   6  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Net accounting
59.  appears and repeat  step 5   To continue to the next step  press the left right arrow to select No and  press OK    7  If the display asks if you want to send the email to your account  press  the left right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK     bad    64 This prompt does not appear if you have activated the Send To  Self option in the email account setup     8  Enter an email subject and press OK     9  Press the left right arrow until the file format you want appears and press  OK or Start   The machine begins scanning and then sends the email     10  If the machine asks if you want to log off your account  press the left   right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK     11  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Scanning to an FTP server   You can scan an image and then upload it to an FTP server  You need to  set up parameters for access to FTP servers from SyncThru   Web  Service  See page 46    Before scanning  you can set the scan options for your scan job  See page 47   1  Make sure that your machine is connected to a network    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF  or place a single original  on the scanner glass    For details about loading an original  see page 32    Press Scan Email     4  Press the left right arrow until Scan to FTP appears on the bottom line  of the display and press OK     5  Enter the user ID and press OK    6  Enter the password and press OK    7  Press the left right arrow until the FTP server you want appears and  pr
60.  available to enhance your machine   s capabilities     This chapter includes     e Precautions to take when installing accessories  e Upgrading a memory module    PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING  ACCESSORIES       e Disconnect the power cord  Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on   To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock  always disconnect the  power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external  accessories    e Discharge static electricity  The control board and internal accessories  network interface card or  memory module  are sensitive to static electricity  Before installing or  removing any internal accessories  discharge static electricity from your  body by touching something metal  such as the metal back plate on any  device plugged into a grounded power source  If you walk around before  finishing the installation  repeat this procedure to discharge any static  electricity again     AN When installing accessories  battery inside the machine is a service  component  Do not change it by yourself   Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type  Dispose  used batteries according to the instructions     UPGRADING A MEMORY MODULE       Your machine has a dual in line memory module  DIMM   Use this memory  module slot to install additional memory    The machine has two memory slots with a factory pre installed memory  module in one slot  When you are expanding the memory capacity  you can  add a memory m
61.  bCe   rough  See page 33     e The paper path may need cleaning  See  AaBbCe H  Cleaning the inside  on page 63    AaBbCc      AaBbCe    AaBbCe                    84 Troubleshooting    If faded areas  generally rounded  occur   randomly on the page    e A single sheet of paper may be defective   Try reprinting the job    e The moisture content of the paper is  uneven or the paper has moist spots on its  surface  Try a different brand of paper  See  page 33    e The paper lot is bad  The manufacturing  processes can cause some areas to reject  toner  Try a different kind or brand of  paper    e Change the printer option and try again  Go  to printer properties  click Paper tab  and  set type to Thick Paper  Refer to the  Software section for details    If these steps do not correct the problem    contact a service representative        White Spots       White spots appear on the page   The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from  the paper falls to the inner devices within  the machine  which means the transfer belt  may be dirty  Clean the inside of your  machine  Contact a service representative    e The paper path may need cleaning   Contact a service representative        Vertical lines          AaBbCe  AaBbCe  AaBbCe  AaBbCe  AaBbCe                  If black vertical streaks appear on the page    e The drum inside the toner cartridge has  probably been scratched  Remove the  toner cartridge and install a new one  See  page 66    If white vertical streaks appear on the 
62.  background    e The print quality and image size may be adjusted and  enhanced at the same time     Scan the originals and send it right away    Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG   TIFF and PDF formats     e Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using  Networks scanning     Set a specific time to transmit a Fax   CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX     e You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also    send the fax to several stored destinations        After the transmission  the machine may print out the fax  reports according to the setting     FEATURES BY MODELS       The machine is designed to support all of your document needs   from printing and copying  to more advanced networking solutions for your business     Basic features of this machine include                                   FEATURES CLX 6200ND CLX 6200FX CLX 6210FX CLX 6240FX  USB 2 0 O   8 e  USB Memory Interface e e e e  DADF  Duplex Automatic Document Feeder  e e e  ADF  Automatic Document Feeder  e  Hard Disk O O e  Network Interface 802 1 1b g wireless LAN O O  Network Interface Enthernet 10 100 Base TX wired LAN e  Duplex  2 sided  printing e e e  FAX    e                       Included  O  Optional  Blank  Not Available     ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE       This user s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage  Both novice  users and professional users can refer t
63.  cloth  You can dampen  the cloth slightly with water  but be careful not to let any water drip onto or  into the machine     Cleaning the inside   During the printing process  paper  toner  and dust particles can accumulate  inside the machine  This buildup can cause print quality problems  such as  toner specks or smearing  Cleaning the inside of the machine clears or  reduces these problems     1  Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord  Wait for the machine to  cool down     2  Using the handle  completely open the front cover        A e Do not touch the green surface  the OPC drum or the front of the  toner cartridge  with your hands or any other material  Use the  handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area    e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt    e If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes  the  OPC drum can be exposed to light  This will cause damage to the  OPC drum  Close the front cover should the installation need to  be halted for any reason     Maintenance 63    3  Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the  cartridge from the machine        A When you open the front cover  be careful not to touch the  underneath of the control panel  the lower part of the fuser unit   The  temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your  skin                    When you open the front cover and work inside the machine  it is  highly recommend that you remove the p
64.  com nz  786   NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com   latin  NORWAY 3 SAMSUNG  7267864  www samsung com no  PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com   latin  PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com ph  7864   1 800 3 SAMSUNG  726   7864   02 5805777  POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG  172678    www samsung com pl  022 607 93 33  PORTUGAL 80820 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com pt  7864   PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com   latin  REP  DOMINICA   1 800 751 2676 www samsung com           latin          COUNTRY     CUSTOMER CARE                                                                REGION CENTER Wee IE  EIRE 0818 717 100 www samsung com ie  RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung ru  SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com sg  7864    SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com sk  7864    SOUTH AFRICA   0860 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com za  7864    SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 www samsung com es  678    SWEDEN 075 SAMSUNG  726 78 64    www samsung com se   SWITZERLAND   0848 SAMSUNG  7267864    www samsung com ch  CHF 0 08 min    TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500   TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com tw   THAILAND 1800 29 3232 www samsung com th  02 689 3232   TRINIDAD  amp  1 800 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com    TOBAGO 7864  latin   TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com tr   U A E 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864    www samsung com ae  8000 4726   U K 0845 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com uk  7864    U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com us   7267864    UKRAINE 8 800 502 0000 www samsung ua 
65.  e This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids     You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack  USOC RJ 11C     Safety information_9    REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG  FOR UK ONLY        Important    The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard  BS 1363  13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse  When you change or examine the  fuse  you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse  You then need to replace the fuse cover  If you have lost the fuse cover  do not use the plug until  you have another fuse cover     The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable  However  some buildings  mainly old ones  do not have  normal 13 amp plug sockets  You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor  Do not remove the moulded plug     A If you cut off the moulded plug  get rid of it straight away   You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket     D Important warning   You must earth this machine     The wires in the mains lead have the following color code   e Green and Yellow  Earth   e Blue  Neutral   e Brown  Live    If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug  do the following     You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter    E    or by the safety    Earth symbol    or colored green and yellow or  green     You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter    N    or co
66.  ee KK KNA 32  Installing the Unified Linux Driver         ntti 32  Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver             2   assasin teeta 33  WsIng SetIP progra MAAGA NG KANG KAKANAN E AA AA AA AA a Aha 34  Starting the program aa r atare E kA aa EEEE DANDAN LABANAN Aha 34  Using the Unified Driver Configurator                saawaaan aaa anan aNG nn netted 34  Opening the Unified Driver Configurator                a asasas anna ban nee entree 34  Printers Configuration 2GB ARALAN ANAKAN haa 35  Scanners Configuration  ANAN Nha AA ham a ba 36  Ports Configuration Xa kA NAT haa on ae Sat Pav cd ba NG a Gn 36  Configuring  Printer Properties  xa maa aan a aa kaaa 37  Printing a Document 7 20  xxaa pp NADAANAN BANAAG EEEa EE E EOE EOE a KAREKA DESEE AN 37  Printing from Applications  2  TANA LA AA a As ban 37  Printing  INOS a AA Pa DA Ba Gn gas 38  Scanning ai DOCUMENT aman NANG KATAGA NANG NATA ANG NE KAANAK ANN AA AG 38  Using the  Mage Manager ima NBA ANNA RANA BAK EEES 39    Chapter 10  USING YOUR PRINTER WITH A MACINTOSH    Installing SOTWaAPC pana kma haaa GAN Gaba haaa aba Kha ha 41  Uninstalling SOWAT           a Sata Ea a e AREA A amare    41  Using SetlP program zan BANG NAAR NADATNAN ATA NANANA NAAN Aa EANA EEA PERRERA E EE 42  Setting Up the Printer 2 14 ALAB AABANG a AA 42  For a Network connected Macintosh            2   asaan ana nanan ee eee EIEEE EEEE EEES 42  FOr a US B CONNGCEED Na aa kA AA ANG AA GAAN added ANA a lS 43  Printing  casdicsiscanihaldiedanid ileia
67.  extend lever       2 Paper length guide          3 Paper width guide       1  Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length  It is preset to  Letter or A4 size depending on the country        2  After inserting paper into the tray  while pinching the paper width guide  as shown  move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the  side of the stack  Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the  paper  the guide may bend the paper        When you use legal sized paper  you need to extend the length of the  tray    3  Press and hold the green lever on the back of the tray  when you are  holding the lever  extend the tray to the corresponding position        4  Load the paper into the tray     36 Loading originals and print media       5  Place the tray into the machine   6  Set the paper size from your computer     64 e Donot push the paper width guides far enough to cause the  materials to warp   e If you do not adjust the paper width guides  it may cause paper    Lan Biz      LOADING PAPER                                        Loading paper in the tray 1 or optional tray   Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1    The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of 75 g m   20 Ib bond  plain   paper    You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to   load an additional 500 sheets of paper   See    on page 91     Z Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems   requi
68.  for more information     22 Introduction       ACKNOWLEDGING THE STATUS OF THE  TONER CARTRIDGE       The status of toner cartridges is indicated by the Status LED and the LCD  display  If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced  the Status LED  turns red and the display shows the message  However the arrow mark  shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new  cartridge     Example     EC sa                The above example shows the black cartridges status indicated by arrows   Check the message to find out what the problem is and how to solve it  See  page 78 to browse the detailed information on error messages     MENU OVERVIEW    The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions  These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu  53    Refer to the following diagram        Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine           Fax Feature Fax Setup Fax Setup Copy Feature Copy Setup Scan Feature Scan Feature   Continued   Continued   Darkness Sending Stamp RCV Name Copy Collation Scan Size USB Memory FTP  Multi Send Redial Times RCV Start Code 2 Up Change Default Scan Size Scan Size  Delay Send Redial Term Auto Reduction 4 Up Copies Original Type Original Type  Priority Send Prefix Dial Discard Size Poster Copy Reduce Enlarge Resolution Resolution  Forward ECM Mode Junk Fax Setup Clone Copy Darkness Scan Color Scan Color
69.  improving   readability and align each color channel registration in color  printing mode   CLX 6200ND  CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  only      click the Color Adjust or Color Matching button     Copies Setting   In order to use this option  first you need to  set total number of copies from Paper tab  When you make  several copies  and if you want to print some copies in color and    copies in grayscale    Color Adjust   You can adjust the appearance of images by  changing the settings in the Levels option    Color Matching   You can adjust the appearance of images by  changing the settings in the Settings option     Extras Tab    You can select output options for your document  See    Printing  a Document    on page 14 for more information about accessing  the printer properties     Click the Extras tab to access the following feature        Advanced Options    You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced   Options button    e Raster Compression  This option determines the  compression level of images for transferring data from a             computer to a printer  If you set this option to Maximum  the  printing speed will be high  but the printing quality will be low   This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6  printer driver   TrueType Options  This option determines what the driver  tells the printer about how to image the text in your document   Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your  document  This feature is available only when
70.  is also used to hold the CCD module to  prevent any damage when you move the machine     Collation    Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets  When  collation is selected  the device prints an entire set before printing  additional copies     Control Panel    A control panel is a flat  typically vertical  area where control or  monitoring instruments are displayed  They are typically found in front of  the machine     Coverage    It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing   For example  5  coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5   image or text on it  So  if the paper or original has complicated images or  lots of text on it  the coverage will be higher and at the same time  a  toner usage will be as much as the coverage     CSV    Comma Separated Values  CSV   A type of file format  CSV is used to  exchange data between disparate applications  The file format  as it is  used in Microsoft Excel  has become a pseudo standard throughout the  industry  even among non Microsoft platforms     102 Glossary       DADF    A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder  DADF  is a mechanism that will  automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the  machine can scan on both sides of the paper     Default    The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box  state  reset  or initialized     DHCP    A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  DHCP  is a client server  networking protocol  A DH
71.  machine and check all the enclosed items   Remove the tape holding the machine tightly    Install the toner cartridge    Load paper   See  Loading paper  on page 36     Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine     Turn the machine on     NDAAON    When you move the machine  do not tilt or turn it upside down   Otherwise  the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner   which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality     PRINTING A DEMO PAGE    Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly   To print a demo page   In ready mode  press and hold the OK button for about 2 seconds        SETTING UP THE NETWORK    You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your  network printer  You can set up the basic network settings through the  machine s control panel        Supported operating environments    The following table shows the network environments supported by the  machine           ITEM REQUIREMENTS  Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 Base TX  e IEEE 802 11 b g Wireless LAN   optional        Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista  e Various Linux OS  e MacOS X 10 3   10 5    TCP IP on Windows  IPP   SNMP   DHCP   BOOTP    Network operating system       Network protocols          Z If you want to set up DHCP network protocol  go to http     developer apple com networking bonjour download   select the  Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating  system and install the program  This pr
72.  materials from  the wrong paper  source        The paper source  selection in the   printer properties  may be incorrect        For many software  applications  the paper  source selection is found  under the Thin Paper tab  within the printer properties   Select the correct paper  source  See the printer driver  help screen     The printer does  not print PDF file  correctly  Some  parts of  graphics  text  or  illustrations are  missing     Incompatibility  between the PDF  file and the Acrobat  products     Printing the PDF file as an  image may solve this  problem  Turn on Print As  Image from the Acrobat  printing options     7  It will take longer to  print when you print a  PDF file as an image        The print quality  of photos is not  good  Images  are not clear        The resolution of the  photo is very low        Reduce the photo size  If you  increase the photo size in the  software application  the  resolution will be reduced              Troubleshooting 83          CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS          POSSIBLE  CONDITION CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  The machine If you are under the   Suggested solutions  Change    prints  but the  text is wrong   garbled  or  incomplete     Dropouts       DOS environment   the font setting for  your machine may  be set incorrectly     the font setting  See   Changing the font  setting  on page 31        Before printing   the machine  emits vapor near  the output tray     Using damp paper  can cause vapor  during printing  
73.  not genuine or refilled     The print quality may get  poor if the refilled toner  cartridge is installed   since its characteristics  may significantly differ  from the genuine    We recommend  Samsung genuine color  toner cartridge           Replace Toner    This message    Replace the toner             v appears between cartridge with a new one   Toner Empty and See page 66   Toner Low status   Replace The life of the part Replace the part with a   xxx  expires totally  new one  Call for  service   Replace The life of the part See page 69 and call for   xxx  Soon expires soon  service   Retry Redial  The machine is You can press OK to    waiting for a specified  time interval to redial  a previously busy  station     immediately redial  or  Stop Clear to cancel the  redial operation           Reverse Jam 0  Check Inside    Paper has jammed in  the paper fuser area  and In the cover of  reverse unit area     Clear the jam  See page  76           Reverse Jam 1  Check Inside    Paper has jammed In  the cover of reverse  unit area or in the rear  cover     Clear the jam  See page  75           Scanner locked    The scanner module  is locked    Unlock the scanner and  press Stop Clear           NonSAMSUNG The color toner You can select either  Toner cartridge which the Stop or Continue with  v arrow indicates is not   the left right arrow   a Samsung genuine If you select Stop by  cartridge  pressing OK on the  Press OK to toggle control panel  the  the message to Stop   machi
74.  or answering machine  plugged into the EXT socket     Receiving in secure receiving mode    You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  unauthorized people  You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict  printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended  In secure  receiving mode  all incoming faxes go into memory  When the mode is  deactivated  any stored faxes are printed     Activating secure receiving mode   1  Press Fax    2  Press Menu    2   and then press OK when Fax Feature appears on the  bottom line of the display    3  Press the left right arrow until Secure Receive appears and press OK    Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK    5  Enter a four digit password you want to use and press OK      gt     64 You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a  password  but cannot protect your faxes     Faxing 53    6  Re enter the password to confirm it and press OK   7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode   When a fax is received in secure receiving mode  your machine stores it in    memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax  received     Printing received faxes   1  Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in     Activating secure receiving mode       2  Press the left right arrow until Print appears and press OK    3  Enter the four digit password and press OK   The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory     Deactivating secure receiving mode  
75.  original  press  Darkness to lighten the background of your  copies    e If no defects are on the original  clean the  scan unit  See page 65           Character Voids                Character voids are white areas within parts of   characters that should be solid black       Ifyou are using transparencies  try another  type of transparency  Because of the  composition of transparencies  some  character voids are normal      You may be printing on the wrong surface  of the paper  Remove the paper and turn it  around    e The paper may not meet paper  specifications  See page 33     Copy image is  skewed     e Ensure that the original is face down on the  scanner glass or face up in the DADF  or  ADF     e Check that the copy paper is loaded  correctly        Blank copies print  out     Ensure that the original is face down on the  scanner glass or face up in the DADF  or  ADF         Image rubs off the  copy easily     e Replace the paper in the tray with paper  from a new package    e In high humidity areas  do not leave paper  in the machine for extended periods of  time           Horizontal stripes                If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears   appear       The toner cartridge may be installed  improperly  Remove the cartridge and  reinsert it       The toner cartridge may be defective   Remove the toner cartridge and install a  new one  See page 66    e If the problem persists  the machine may  require repair  Contact a service  representative     Frequ
76.  original and set the scan size to A5  the machine scans only the   area of A5  148 x 210 mm   We recommend you to change the right scan   size for the original paper  This function is only available in CLX 6200ND    CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX  After loading the print media for copy output    you need to set the scan size using the control panel buttons    1  Press Copy    2  Press Menu  23  until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    3  Press OK when Scan Size appears    4  Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press  OK    5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode        After using this option  the machine automatically resumes to the  default setting     CHANGING THE DEFAULT COPY SETTINGS       The copy options  including darkness  original type  copy size  and number   of copies  can be set to those most frequently used  When you copy a   document  the default settings are used unless they have been changed by   using the corresponding buttons on the control panel    1  Press Copy    2  Press Menu  3  until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    3  Press OK when Change Default appears     4  Press the left right arrow until the setup option you want appears and  press OK     5  Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press  OK     6  Repeat steps 4 through 5  as needed   Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Ta  While you are setting copy options  pre
77.  paper is jammed in the paper exit area  follow the next steps to release   the jammed paper    1  Ifa long portion of the paper is visible  pull it straight out  Open and close  the front cover firmly  The machine will resume printing        If you cannot find the jammed paper  or if there is any resistance  removing the paper  stop pulling and go to step 2     2  Open the scan unit        3  Open the cover of reverse unit using the handle on it and carefully take  the jammed paper out of the machine        76 _ Troubleshooting       BP    If there is any resistance removing the paper or difficulty picking up  jammed paper  stop pulling and turn the release knob to the direction as  shown to remove the misfed paper        Close the cover of reverse unit    Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely  closed  Make sure that it is securely latched    Be careful not to pinch your fingers        A If the scan unit is not completely closed  the machine will not  operate    If you cannot find the jammed paper  or if there is any resistance  removing the paper  stop pulling and go to step 6    Open the rear cover and carefully take the jammed paper out of the  machine        7  Close the rear cover  5  Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown  To avoid tearing the   paper  pull it out gently and slowly    In the optional tray   If paper is jammed in the optional Tray  follow the next steps to release the   jammed paper    1  Pull the optional Tray o
78.  power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm       The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation  If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with    110 V machine  then it should be 16 AWG  or bigger       Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord       SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS    This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased   Due to different voltage  frequency  telecommunication    configuration and etc     a  AWG  American Wire Gauge    LASER SAFETY STATEMENT       The printer is certified in the U S  to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR  chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1  laser products  and  elsewhere is certified as a Class   laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825     Class   laser products are not considered to be hazardous  The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to  laser radiation above a Class   level during normal operation  user maintenance or prescribed service condition     WARNING    Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly  The reflected beam  although invisible   can damage your eyes     When using this product  these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire  electric shock  and injury to persons     6_ Safety information       CAUTION   CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN  AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM   DANGER  LASER RADI
79.  printer does not have a duplex unit  you should  complete the printing job manually  The printer prints every  other page of the document first  After printing the first side of  your job  the Printing Tip window appears  Follow the on   screen instructions to complete the printing job        21             T           Advanced Printing       Printing a Reduced or Enlarged  Document    You can change the size of a page s content to appear larger or  smaller on the printed page    1 To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    From the Paper tab  select Reduce  Enlarge in the  Printing Type drop down list    Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box     WwW N    You can also click the w or 4 button   Select the paper source  size  and type in Paper Options   Click OK and print the document     Ub       Fitting Your Document to a  Selected Paper Size    This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any  selected paper size regardless of the digital document size  This  can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small  document    1 To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    From the Paper tab  select Fit to Page in the Printing  Type drop down list    Select the correct size from the Output size drop down  list    Select the paper source  size  and type in Paper Opti
80.  restores the default copy  settings  if you do not start copying after changing them on the control panel     1  Press Menu    2  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears    3  Press the left right arrow until Timeout appears and press OK       Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears   Selecting Off means that the machine does not restore the default  settings until you press Black Start or Color Start to begin copying  or  Stop Clear to cancel      Press OK to save your selection      Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode        Copying_ 43    scanning       Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer     This chapter includes     e Scanning basics      Scanning from the control panel   e Scanning by a network connection   e Changing the settings for each scan job   The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various  factors  including computer speed  available disk space  memory  the  size of the image being scanned  and bit depth settings  Thus   depending on your system and what you are scanning  you may not  be able to scan at certain resolutions  especially using enhanced  resolution     SCANNING BASICS       You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the   network    e Samsung Scan Manager  You just walk to the machine with the  originals and scan them from th
81.  scan can be  initiated from within the program   an image capture API for Microsoft  Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems     UNC Path    Uniform Naming Convention  UNC  is a standard way to access network  shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products  The format of a  UNC path is     lt servername gt   lt sharename gt   lt Additional directory gt     URL    Uniform Resource Locator  URL  is the global address of documents  and resources on the Internet  The first part of the address indicates  what protocol to use  the second part specifies the IP address or the  domain name where the resource is located     USB    Universal Serial Bus  USB  is a standard that was developed by the  USB Implementers Forum  Inc   to connect computers and peripherals   Unlike the parallel port  USB is designed to concurrently connect a  single computer USB port to multiple peripherals     Watermark    A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears  lighter when viewed by transmitted light  Watermarks were first  introduced in Bologna  Italy in 1282  they have been used by  papermakers to identify their product  and also on postage stamps   currency  and other government documents to discourage  counterfeiting     WIA    Windows Imaging Architecture  WIA  is an imaging architecture that is  originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP  A scan can be  initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant  scanner        Glossary_ 105     
82.  set list   Click Apply     Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding    languages    e Russian  CP866  ISO 8859 5 Latin Cyrillic   e Hebrew  Hebrew 15Q  Hebrew 8  Hebrew 7  Israel only    e Greek  ISO 8859 7 Latin Greek  PC 8 Latin Greek   e Arabic  amp  Farsi  HP Arabic 8  Windows Arabic  Code Page 864   Farsi  ISO 8859 6 Latin Arabic   e OCR  OCR A  OCR B       Getting started_ 31    loading orginals and print media       This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine     This chapter includes     e Loading originals     Selecting print media  e Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray    LOADING ORIGINALS       You can use the scanner glass or DADF  or ADF  to load an original for  copying  scanning  and sending a fax     L  CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX has the DADF function  which can let you scan on both sides of the original media at once   See  Scan on both sides of paper  on page 49     On the scanner glass   Make sure that no originals are in the DADF  or ADF   If an original is  detected in the DADF  or ADF   the machine gives it priority over the original  on the scanner glass  To get the best scan quality  especially for colored or  gray scaled images  use the scanner glass     1  Lift and open the scanner lid        32 Loading originals and print media       e Loading paper  e Adjusting the output support    Setting the paper size and type    2  Place the original face down on the scanne
83.  setting up the printer 42  MFP driver  install  Linux 32    N   n up printing  Macintosh 46  Windows 19    O    orientation  print  Windows 15    48    overlay  create 23  delete 23  print 23    P    Paper properties  set 16  paper size  set 16  paper source  set  Windows 16  paper tray  set  copy 25  poster  print 20  PostScript driver  installing 24  print  document 14  fit to page 21  from Macintosh 44  from Windows 14  N up  Macintosh 46  Windows 19  overlay 23  PRN 14  scaling 21  watermark 22  printer driver  install  Linux 32  printer properties  Linux 37  printer properties  set  Macintosh 44  Windows 15  24  printer resolution  set  Windows 17  printer software  install  Macintosh 41  Windows 5  uninstall  Macintosh 41    Windows 12  printing    booklets 20  double sided 21  from Linux 37    S    scanning  Linux 38  SmarThru 27  TWAIN 29  WIA driver 29  scanning from Macintosh 47  setting  advanced option 17  color mode 17  darkness 17  favorites 18  resolution    Windows 17  software  install  Macintosh 41  42  Windows 5  reinstall    Windows 11  system requirements  Macintosh 41  42   uninstall    Macintosh 41  Windows 12  status monitor  use 30    T  TWAIN  scan 29    U    uninstall  software  Macintosh 41  Windows 12  uninstalling  MFP driver    Linux 33  Using 22    W    watermark  create 22  delete 22  edit 22  print 22   WIA  scan 29    49    
84.  the  appropriate network parameters to use your printer in a wireless network   To do this  you can use both control panel and SyncThru Web Service  an  embedded web site of your printer  This section gives you basic information  on 802 11b g network parameters which can be configured from the control  panel     You can configure basic wireless settings  such as SSID  Operation Mode   and channels  You can retrieve basic settings by selecting a wireless  network or manually configure them as you need     1  Press Menu  23  until Network appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK   2  Press the left right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK   3  Press OK when WLAN Basic appears   4  Press the left right arrow to select the setup method you want and press  OK   e Search List  The wireless network interface card on your printer  searches for wireless networks in the area and shows the results   e Custom  You can configure the wireless settings according to your  needs        5  If you selected Search List  press the left right arrow to select a network  and press OK   If you selected Custom  set each network options     e Edit SSID  Enter the SSID  the name that identifies a wireless  network  SSID is case sensitive so you need to enter it     e Operation Mode  Select the type of wireless connections   In Ad Hoc mode  wireless cards communicate directly each other   In Infrastructure mode  network cards communicate with each other  through an access point  wh
85.  the jammed paper gently out of the DADF        This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its  model     4  Close the DADF cover  Then load the removed pages  if any  back  into the DADF        64 To prevent document jams  use the scanner glass for thick  thin  or  mixed paper type originals     72 Troubleshooting       Exit misfeed  1  Remove any remaining pages from the DADF  or ADF      2  Seize the misfeed paper  and remove the paper from the document  output tray by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands        3  Load the removed pages back into the DADF  or ADF      Roller misfeed  1  Open the scanner lid     2  Seize the misfeed paper  and remove the paper from the feed area by  carefully pulling it to the right using both hands        3  Close the scanner lid  Then load the removed pages back into the DADF   or ADF      CLEARING PAPER JAMS       When a paper jam occurs  the warning message appears on the display  screen  Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam                       MESSAGE LOCATION OF JAM GO TO  MP Tray In the multi purpose tray Page 74  Paper Jam 0  Tray 2 In the optional tray Page 77  Paper jam 0  Paper Jam 0 In the paper feed area or Page 73  Page 75  Open Close Door inside the machine  Paper Jam 1 Inside the machine Page 73  Page 75  Open Close Door  Paper Jam 2 Inside the machine or in Page 73  Page 75  Check Inside the fuser area       Reverse Jam 0  Check Inside    In the fuser area or in the  c
86.  the list     3  Enter the network card s MAC address  IP address  subnet mask   default gateway  and then click Apply     Z If you do not know the network card s MAC address  print the  machine s network information report   See  Printing reports  on  page 62    4  Click OK to confirm the settings   5  Click Exit to close the SetIP program     SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS       Before you begin  ensure that your system meets the following  requirements     Windows  Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems                             REQUIREMENT  RECOMMENDED   OPERATING  SYSTEM FREE HDD  cnu ali SPACE  Windows 2000 Pentium Il 400 MHz 64 MB 600 MB   Pentium Ill 933 MHz     128 MB   Windows XP Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB 1 5 GB   Pentium IV 1 GHz   256 MB   Windows Server   Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB 1 25 GB to  2003  Pentium IV 1 GHz   512 MB  2 GB  Windows Vista Pentium IV 3 GHZ 512 MB 15 GB   1024 MB   Windows Server   Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB  2008  Pentium IV 2 GHz   2048 MB              64 e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all  Windows operating systems   e Users who have an administrator right can install the software   e Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine                 Macintosh  REQUIREMENT  RECOMMENDED   OPERATING  SYSTEM FREE HDD  CPU RAM SPACE  Mac OS X e Intel Processor  e 128 MB fora 1 GB  10 3   10 4 e Power PC G4  Power PC based  G5 Mac  512 MB    e 512 MB for an  Intel based Mac   1 GB   Ma
87.  the slot properly   carefully try the previous procedure again     7  Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws           8  Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw   9  Reconnect the power cord and printer cable  and turn the machine on     1g To release the memory module  pull the two tabs on the sides of  the slot outwards  then the module springs out     Activating the added memory in the PS printer  properties   After installing the memory module  you need to select it in the printer  properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it     94 Installing accessories       1  Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your  computer  For details about installing the PS printer driver  see Software  secion    2  Click the Windows Start menu    3  For Windows 2000  select Settings and then Printers    For Windows XP 2003  select Printers and Faxes   For Windows Vista  select Control Panel  gt  Hardware and Sound  gt   Printers    4  Select the Samsung CLX 6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX 6240  Series PS printer    5  Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties    6  For Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista  select Device Settings    7  Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the  Installable Options section    8  Click OK     USING A WIRELESS NETWORK INTERFACE CARD       The CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX and CLX 6240FX is equipped with a  network interface which allows
88.  this file to run your machine  from a Macintosh computer and print  documents    Scanner driver  TWAIN driver is  available for scanning documents on  your machine    Smart Panel  This program allows you  to monitor the machine s status and  alerts you when an error occurs during  printing        a  Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image  editor and to send the image by email  You can also open another image  editor program  like Adobe Photoshop  from SmarThru  For details  refer to  the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program     24 Introduction       PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES       Your printer drivers support the following standard features   e Paper orientation  size  source and media type selection    e Number of copies    In addition  you can use various special printing features  The following  table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer    drivers     Printer driver                                                                                  FEATURE WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH   Color mode O O  Machine quality option O O O  Poster printing O X X  Multiple pages per sheet O O  2  4  O   N up    Fit to page printing O X O   Scale printing O X O  Different source for first X   page   Watermark O X X  Overlay O x   Duplex O X O  a  This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10 3    PostScript driver   FEATURE WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH   Color mode O   Machine quality option O O O  Poster printing X X X  Multiple pag
89.  time period  When a fax arrives at your  machine  it is stored in memory  Then  the machine dials the fax number  that you have specified and sends the fax     1  Press Fax    2  Press Menu  23  until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK   Press OK when Fax appears    Press the left right arrow until Rev  Forward appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK     To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  completed  select Forward amp Print     7  Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent  and press OK     8  Enter the starting time and press OK   9  Enter the ending time and press OK   10  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax  machine     DM PS    Forwarding received faxes to email address    You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to the email  address you entered     1  Press Fax    2  Press Menu  23  until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until E mail appears and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Rev  Forward appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK     To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  complete
90.  to 163 g m   16 to 43 Ib tray    bond  for the multi purpose    100 sheets of 75 g m   A6 105 x 148 mm  4 13 x 5 82 inches  tray  20 Ib bond  in the multi   purpose tray  Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm  3 87 x 7 5 inches  75 to 105 g m   20 to 28 Ib 10 sheets of 75 g m   20 Ib  bond  bond  in the multi purpose  Envelope 6 3 4 92 x 165 mm  3 62 x 6 5 inches  tray  Envelope No  10 105 x 241 mm  4 12 x 9 5 inches   Envelope No  9 98 x 225 mm  3 87 x 8 87 inches   Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm  4 33 x 8 66 inches   Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm  6 37 x 9 01 inches   Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm  4 48 x 6 38 inches   Labels Letter  Legal  US Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m   32 to 40 Ib 10 sheets of 75 g m   20 Ib  Folio  A4  JIS B5  ISO bond  bond  paper for the multi   B5  Executive  A5  purpose tray  Statement  Card stock Letter  Legal  US Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 163 g m   24 to 43 Ib 10 sheets of 75 g m   20 Ib       Folio  A4  JIS B5  ISO  B5  Executive  A5   Statement    bond        bond  paper for the multi   purpose tray       Minimum size  custom     76 x 127 mm  3 x 5 inches        Maximum size  custom        216 x 356 mm  8 5 x 14 inches        60 to 163 g m   16 to43 Ib bond        a  If media weight is over 105 g m   28 Ib bond   use the multi purpose tray   b  Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight  thickness  and environmental conditions     34 Loading originals and print media    Media sizes supported in each mode          ME
91.  to the telephone network  the telephone  company should notify the customer that service may be stopped  However  where prior notice is impractical  the company may   temporarily cease service  providing that they    a  promptly notify the customer    b  give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem    c  inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in  FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68     You should also know that     e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system    e If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine  you may experience transmission and  reception problems with all the equipment  It is recommended that no other equipment  except for a regular telephone  share the line with  your machine    e If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges  we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power  and the telephone lines  Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores    e When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers  use a non emergency number to advise the  emergency service dispatcher of your intentions  The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency  number    e This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines   
92.  underneath of the control panel  the lower part of the fuser unit   The  temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your  skin           When you open the front cover and work inside the machine  it is  highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first   Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt     4  Take a new toner cartridge out of its package        A e Don t use sharp objects  such as a knife or scissors  to open  the toner cartridge package  You could damage the surface of  the toner cartridge    e To prevent damage  do not expose the toner cartridge to light  for more than a few minutes  Cover it with a piece of paper to  protect it if necessary     Maintenance 67    5  Holding both handles on the toner cartridge  thoroughly rock it from side  to side to evenly distribute the toner     ROR       6  Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface  as shown  and remove the  paper covering the toner cartridge by removing the tape        If toner gets on your clothing  wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  it in cold water  Hot water sets toner into fabric     7  Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and  then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge  Insert the cartridge until it  clicks into place        8  Close the front cover  Make sure the cover is securely latched  and then  turn the machine on     N If the front cover is not completely closed  the machine will not  operate     Cl
93.  you to use your machine on a network  You  can also purchase a wireless network interface card to enable the use of the  printer in wireless network environments   For order information  see page 91   Review the precautions on page 93 and then follow this procedure to install  the wireless network interface card in your machine     Installing a wireless network interface card  1  Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine   2  Release the screws and remove the rear cover           3  Release the screws  then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to  the right        1 Control board  cover          4  Align the connector on the wireless network interface card with the  connector on the control board  Push the card firmly into the connector  on the control board until it is completely and securely in place           1 Connector       2 Wireless network  interface card          5  Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws           6  Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw   7  Reconnect the power cord and printer cable  and turn the machine on     4 For information about configuring and using the printer on a wireless  network environment  refer to the user s guide provided with the  wireless network interface card  You can also configure the network  parameters on the control panel  see the next column     Configuring basic network settings    After installing the wireless network card  you must configure
94.  you use  the PCL 6 printer driver     Download as Outline  When this option is selected  the  driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your                                                                                        some in grayscale  use this option and select the number of                                                                                       document not already stored  resident  on your printer  If  17  Basic Printing                 amp  Printing Preferences PIRK   Layout   Paper   Graphic   Extras   About  Watermark  No Watermark  v Edit s  Overlay   No Overlay     Dutput Options  Print Subset Normal  1 2 3  vi  v  Use Printer Fonts Letter  8 50 x 11 00 in  O mm   inch    Copies  1  Quality  Normal    Favorites    Job Setting Painter Default x     ELECTRONICS             OK Cancel Help    Watermark    You can create a background text image to be printed on each  page of your document  For details  see    Using Watermarks    on  page 22     Overlay  Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and  letterhead paper  For details  see    Using Overlays    on page 23     Output Options      Print Subset  You can set the sequence in which the pages   print  Select the print order from the drop down list      Normal  1 2 3   Your printer prints all pages from the first  page to the last page      Reverse All Pages  3 2 1   Your printer prints all pages  from the last page to the first page      Print Odd Pages  Your 
95. 0  Enter your login name  password  maximum number of search  results and search timeout     L  LDAP Referral  LDAP client will search referral server if the  LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP server  has a referral server     11  Select Serach Name Order that you desire    12  Check the box next to  From   Field Security Options    4 This option is only provided if you have selected the Network  authentication option in the user authentication setting  You may  check this option if you want to search for information in a default  email address group     13  Click Apply     Setting up an e mail account    To scan and send an image as an email attachment  you need to set up  network parameters using SyncThru    Web Service     1  Enter your machine   s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  Go to access the web site of your machine     Click Machine Settings and E mail Setup    Select IP Address or Host Name    Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name    Enter the server port number  from 1 to 65535    The default port number is 25    6  Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require  authentication    7  Enter the SMTP server login name and password    8  Click Apply     L  If the authentication method of SMTP server is  POP3beforeSMTP  check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3  Before SMTP Authentication    a  Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host  name    b  Enter the server port nu
96. ATION AVOID DIRECT  EXPOSURE TO BEAM  RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS  D OUVERTURE  EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION  DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU   UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG  WENN  ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET   NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN   RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI  APERTURA  EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO   RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE   EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO     RADIA    O LASER INVIS  VEL AO ABRIR  EVITE  EXPOSI    O DIRECTA AO FEIXE     ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE  KLEP  DEZE KLEP NIET OPENEN   USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING VED   BNING   UNDG   UDSAETTELSE FOR STR  LNING   USYNLIG LASERSTR  LNING N  R DEKSEL    PNES  UNNG   EKSPONERING FOR STR  LEN    OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING N  R DENNA DEL  AR   PPEN  STRALEN AR FARLIG     NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA AVATTAESSA   VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE      FABE ABO  5 9  0  GS Ho alo Mao  Kag   Joos  ETO NAEI    DANGER      VORSICHT      ATTENZIONE    PRECAUCION    PERIGO  GEVAAR  ADVARSEL    ADVARSEL     VARNING    VAROITUS                OZONE SAFETY    During normal operation  this machine produces ozone  The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator  However  it is  E advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area     If you need additional information about ozone  request your nearest Samsung dealer        MERCURY SAFETY    Contains Mercury  Dispose According to Local  State or Federal Laws   U S A only        POWER SAVER    This printer contains advanced energy conservation tech
97. CLX 6200 Series  CLX 6240 Series          U Functional Printer  User s Guide U       imagine the possibilities    Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product   To receive a more complete service  please  register your product at    www samsung com register          features of your new laser product       Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print   With the machine  you can     SPECIAL FEATURES                                                                      Print with excellent quality and speed    You can print in a full range of colors using cyan  magenta   yellow  and black    You can print with a resolution of up to 2400 x 600 dpi  See  Software section    Your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 20 ppm  CLX   6200 series   24 ppm  CLX 6240 series  and letter sized  paper at up to 21 ppm  CLX 6200 series   25 ppm  CLX   6240 series      Handle many different types of printable material    The multi purpose tray supports letterhead  envelopes   labels  custom sized media  postcards  and heavy paper   The multi purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain  paper    The 250 sheet tray 1 and 500 sheet optional tray support  plain paper in various sizes     Create professional documents    Print Watermarks  You can customize your documents with  words  such as    Confidential     See Software section    Print Posters  The text and pictures of each page of your  document are magpnified and printed a
98. CLX 6240 Series  Up to 24 cpm A4   25 cpm     Letter        Copy  resolution    Text       DADF  or ADF   Up to 600 x 600 dpi  e Scanner glass  Up to 600 x 600 dpi       Text   photo    Up to 600 x 600 dpi       Magazine    Up to 600 x 600 dpi       Photo       e DADF  or ADF   Up to 600 x 600 dpi  e Scanner glass  Up to 1 200 x 1 200 dpi       Zoom range       e DADF  or ADF   25  to 100   e Scanner glass  25  to 400        a  Copy speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy     FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS       1g The fax feature may not be supported depending on machines                 ITEM DESCRIPTION  Compatibility ITU T G3  Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network  PSTN  or  behind PABX  Data coding MH MR MMR JBIG JPEG       Modem speed    33 6 Kbps       Transmission  speed    Up to 3 seconds page          Maximum  document length    356 mm       Resolution    Color 200 x 200 dpi       Black e Standard  Up to 203 x 98 dpi   e Fine  Up to 203 x 196 dpi   e Super Fine  Up to 300 x 300 dpi   Receiving only           Memory    e CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  4 MB  Approx  200  pages   e CLX 6240FX  500 Jobs  Tx  100  Rx  400        Halftone       256 levels       a  Standard resolution  MMR JBIG   Maximum modem speed  Phase    C     by ITU T No  1 chart  Memory Tx  ECM        Specifications_ 101       glossary    1    The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well  as mentioned in 
99. CP server provides configuration parameters  specific to the DHCP client host requesting  generally  information  required by the client host to participate on an IP network  DHCP also  provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts     DIMM    Dual Inline Memory Module  DIMM   a small circuit board that holds  memory  DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data   received fax data     DNS    The Domain Name Server  DNS  is a system that stores information  associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks   such as the Internet     Dot Matrix Printer    A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head  that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact  striking an  ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper  much like a typewriter     DPI    Dots Per Inch  DPI  is a measurement of resolution that is used for  scanning and printing  Generally  higher DPI results in a higher  resolution  more visible detail in the image  and a larger file size     DRPD    Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  Distinctive Ring is a telephone  company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to  answer several different telephone numbers     Duplex    A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the  machine can print  or scan  on both sides of the paper  A printer  equipped with a Duplex can print double sided of paper     Duty Cycle    Duty cycle is the page qua
100. Check the paper type and quality  See page  33    Turn over the stack of paper in the tray  Also  try rotating the paper 180   in the tray           Misformed  characters       AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc                e  f characters are improperly formed and    producing hollow images  the paper stock  may be too slick  Try a different paper  See  page 33     e  f characters are improperly formed and    producing a wavy effect  the scanner unit  may need service  For service  contact a  service representative     Back of printouts  are dirty    AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc          Check for leaking toner  Clean the inside of  the machine  See page 63           Solid Color or  Black pages          The toner cartridge may not be installed  properly  Remove the cartridge and reinsert  it    The toner cartridge may be defective and  need replacing  Remove the toner cartridge  and install a new one  See page 66    The machine may require repair  Contact a  service representative           Troubleshooting_ 85       CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS          Loose toner          e Clean the inside of the machine  See page  63    e Check the paper type and quality  See page  33       Remove the toner cartridge and install a  new one  See page 66    e If the problem persists  the machine may  require repair  Contact a service  representative     CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS       Smears  lines   marks  or spots  appears on copies     e If defects are on the
101. DIA TYPE    GUIDELINES                MODE SIZE SOURCE  Copy mode Letter  A4  Legal  e tray 1  Oficio  US Folio  e optional tray 2  Executive  JIS B5  A5  e multi purpose tray  A6  Print mode All sizes supported by    tray 1  the machine e optional tray 2  e multi purpose tray  Fax mode  Letter  A4  Legal e tray 1    e optional tray 2    Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with  more than one flap that folds over to seal must use  adhesives compatible with the machine   s fusing  temperature for 0 1 second  Check your machine   s  specification to view the fusing temperature  see  page 100  The extra flaps and strips might cause  wrinkling  creasing  or jams  and may even damage  the fuser    For the best print quality  position margins no closer  than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope    Avoid printing over the area where the envelope   s  seams meet           Duplex printing       Letter  A4  Legal  US tray 1  Folio  Oficio e optional tray 2  e multi purpose tray             a  CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only  b 75 to 105 g m   20 28 Ib bond  only    Guidelines for special print media       MEDIA TYPE    GUIDELINES       Envelopes       Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the  quality of the envelopes  When selecting envelopes   consider the following factors      Weight  The weight of the envelope paper should  not exceed 90 g m  or jamming may occur      Construction  Prior to printing  envelopes should  lie flat with less than 6 mm curl  and 
102. FF  BMP  JPEG  PDF  and PRN files    Direct Print option supported file types    e PRN  Samsung PCL 6 compatible    e PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when  you print a document  The document will be saved as a PRN file  rather  than printed on paper  Only PRN files created in this fashion can be  printed directly from USB memory  See the Software Section to learn  how to create a PRN file    BMP  BMP Uncompressed   TIFF  TIFF 6 0 Baseline   JPEG  JPEG Baseline   PDF  PDF 1 4 and below    To print a document from a USB memory device   1  Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  machine  If one has already been inserted  press USB Print   Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it   2  Press the left right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and  press OK   If you see D in the front of a folder name  there are one or more files or  folders in the selected folder     60 Using USB flash memory       3  If you selected a file  skip to the next step   If you selected a folder  press the left right arrow until the file you want  appears    4  Press the left right arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or  enter the number    5  Press OK  Color Start or Black Start to start printing the selected file   There are two types of mode as following   e OKor Color Start  Color print  e Black Start  Black and White print  After printing the file  the display asks if you want to print 
103. Fax appears on the top line of the display    Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs    4  Enter the receiving fax machine s number    You can use speed buttons  speed dial numbers  or group dial numbers    For details about storing and searching for a number  see page 57    Press Color Start or Black Start    6  If an original is placed on the scanner glass  select Yes to add another  page  Load another original and press OK    7  When you have finished  select No at the Another Page  prompt   After the number is dialed  the machine begins sending the fax when the  receiving fax machine answers     When you want to cancel a fax job  press Stop Clear at any time while  sending            a    Sending a fax manually   1  Press Fax    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original  face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32    3  Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs  See page  51    4  Press On Hook Dial  You hear a dial tone    5  Enter the receiving fax machine   s number   You can use speed buttons  speed dial numbers  or group dial numbers   For details about storing and searching for a number  see page 57    6  Press Color Start or Black Start when you hear a high pitched fax  signal from the remote fax machine     When you want to cancel a fax job  press Stop Clear at any time while  sending     Confirming a transmission   When the last page of your origi
104. G  800  www samsung com cz   REPUBLIC 726786    Samsung Zrt     esk   organiza  n   slo  ka  Oasis  Florenc  Sokolovsk  394 17  180 00  Praha 8  DENMARK 8 SAMSUNG  7267864  www samsung com dk  ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com   latin  EL SALVADOR   800 6225 www samsung com   latin  ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com ee  KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com   kz_ru  KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500  FINLAND 30 6227 515 www samsung com fi  FRANCE 3260 dites    SAMSUNG         www samsung com fr  0 15 min   0 825 08 65 65      0 15 min    GERMANY 01805   SAMSUNG  726  www samsung de  7864     0 14 min    GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com           latin          108 _Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    COUNTRY  CUSTOMER CARE  REGION CENTER Waz ie  HONDURAS 800 7919267 www samsung com   latin  HONG KONG 3698 4698 www samsung com hk  HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com hu  7864   INDIA 3030 8282 www samsung com in  1800 110011  1800 3000 8282  INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com id  ITALIA 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864  www samsung com it  JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com   latin  JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com jp  LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com lv  LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com lIt  LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www samsung com lu  MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com my  MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com mx  7864   NETHERLANDS   0900 SAMSUNG  0900  www samsung com nl  7267864       0 10 min   NEW ZEALAND   0800 SAMSUNG  0800 726   www samsung
105. Inside    Paper has jammed  during duplex printing   This is applicable only  to machines with this  feature     Clear the jam   See page 73           attempts    Stop Pressed  Stop Clear has been   Try again    pressed during an   operation    yyy  There is no paper in Load paper in the tray   Paper Empty the tray    yyy  The paper size Load the correct paper in  Paper Mismatch specified in the printer   the tray     properties does not  match the paper you    Duplex Jam 1  Open Close Door    Paper has jammed  during duplex printing   This is applicable only  to machines with this  feature     Clear the jam   See page 73                    are loading    yyy  The tray cassette is To close the tray  lower  Cassette Out not properly closed  the rear edge  align it  with the slot  and slide it  into the printer   Adjusting    The machine is Wait a few minutes   Registration adjusting the color  registration  Authentication The ID or password Enter the correct ID or  Failure you entered is password   incorrect                 78 _ Troubleshooting    Enter Again You entered an Enter the correct item  unavailable item  again   File Access Login to the network Change the server  Denied server was settings   successful  However   access to the file on  the network server  was denied   File Format The selected file Use the correct file  Not Supported format is not format        supported                    MESSAGE    MEANING    SUGGESTED  SOLUTIONS    SUGGESTED          File Name Exi
106. K     5  Press the left right arrow to select the color mode you  want   There are two types of mode as following   e Yes Color  Color copy  e Yes Mono  Black and White copy  6  Press OK to begin copying                                      64 You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge button for  making a 2  or 4 up copy     Poster copying  Your machine can print an image onto 9 sheets of paper  3x3   You can  paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document   This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  glass   1  Press Copy   2  Place a single original face down on the scanner glass      For details about loading an original  see page 32   3  Press Menu  13  until Copy Feature appears on the  bottom line of the display and press OK    4  Press the left right arrow until Poster Copy appears  and press OK    5  Press the left right arrow to select the color mode you  want   There are two types of mode as following   e Yes Color  Color copy  e Yes Mono  Black and White copy   6  Press OK to begin copying    Your original is divided into 9 portions  Each portion is             y  La  ia             NE              AIRS                scanned and printed one by one in the following order     Beles  4 5 6  7 8 o                   Clone copying   Your machine can print multiple image copies from the original document on  a single page  The number of images is automatically determined by the  original image and paper 
107. Ka NKn nn kananaNG 8   Reinstalling Printer Software                  sasaaaa aan anan aNG EE rene t nent EEEE EEE 11   Removing Printer Software 2 0    EEE Een en 12   Installing mono printer driver        0  etna eee teeta es 12    Chapter 2  BASIC PRINTING    Printing  a DOCUMENE 4 0   veseuaseiterex A eaves bares Gees vad tb E EAEE vl eee ees EE EE E envio avieesiaied 14  Printing toca file  PRN   aman Ana La AAKALA a 14  Printer Settings 2a AG E EE AA AN AA Aa ANA 15  Layout Tabi a nye fee BARE LG AA Aba 15  Paper TaD AA AA AA les Handed oopbnnhersborrimonia in 16  Graphics Tab  mah atid Gates NLA ANNA cei Sea ena eae caine Garage AA 17  Extras Tabir scri tin ansdwasna nach enattionvacid KAEA KAA AENEA EEEE EE Rose we das ananassae 17  ADOUT AA vie seer E AA 18  Printer VAD  a AA aus aie Sates externa E EE 18  Using a Favorite Setting ssas cecsudinonedntessanensnniedionasdoreuinnendindes Gates OES LE R E EEA 18  Using Help picio nnr EEEE EE EEREN R EER EER BALA ad 18    Chapter 3  ADVANCED PRINTI NG    Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper  N Up Printing     essssssssesessriersrrererrerrrrerrrrerrrrrreees 19  Printing POSEGIS amn r E EE DARA a kaa a ER 20  Printing BOOKICES   sso  ccceusisasioabenonevseaiiaads Ena E OARE SA E R AEEA E E AE SAARE IRENI 20  Printing on Both Sides Of Paper                 2   a EE ENCA EASES EREE E ea 21  Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document            2 2 20  ne nnn tied 21  Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size 00    t
108. L DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE   DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT   STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE   EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed  i e  this code cannot simply  be copied and put under another distribution licence  including the GNU Public Licence      12_Safety information          ELECTRONICS    Declaration of Conformity    Manufactured at   of Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd    259  Gongdan Dong  Gumi City  Gyeongsangbuk Do  730 030 Korea    of Samsung Electronics Shandong  Digital Printing Co   Ltd   264209  Samsung Road  Weihai Hi Tech IDZ  Shandong Province  China     Factory name  address        We hereby declare  that the product above is in compliance with the essential requirements of the  R amp TTE Directive  1995 5 EC  by application of   LVD EN 60950 1 2001 A11  EMC EN 55022 1998   A1 2000   A2 2003  EN 55024 1998   A1 2001   A2 2003  EN 61000 3 2 2000   A2 2005  EN 61000 3 3 1995   A1 2001  R amp TTE ETSI EG 201 121  February 2000   ETSITS 103 021  ETSI ES 201 187  The Technical documentation is kept at the below Manufacturer   s address     Manufacturer             Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd    259 
109. Lev  1 2  The higher the number is  the more vivid the  background is   e Erase Lev  1 4  The higher the number is  the lighter the  background is   6  Press OK to begin copying   7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Book copying   The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book  If the book is too   thick  lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close   the cover  If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm  start copying with   the cover open    1  Press Copy    2  Place a single original face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32    3  Press Menu  33  until Copy Feature appears on the   bottom line of the display and press OK    Press OK when Book Copy appears     5  Press the left right arrow until the binding option you  want appears     e Off  Does not use this feature   e Left Page  Use this option to print left page of the book   e Right Page  Use this option to print right page of the book   e Both Page  Use this option to print both pages of the book   6  Press the left right arrow to select the color mode you want   There are two types of mode as following   e Yes Color  Color copy  e Yes Mono  Black and White copy  7  Press OK to begin copying      gt        Margin shift    The Margin Shift feature allows you to create a binding edge for the  document  The image can be adjusted up or down on the page and or  shifted to the right or left     L  The Margin Shift feature can eith
110. MAA       It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before  running Setup        Select a language from the list below     English X    Cancel j    e If necessary  select a language from the drop down list                 4 Select Typical installation for a local printer  Click  Next       aor    Select Installation Type    Select type that you want and click  Next  button     i Typical installation for a    local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s    computer    C Typical installation for a    network printer Install software for a device that is on network  Wired or Wireless     You can select installation options  This option is recommended for  professional users        Custom installation     lt Back Cancel                Installing Printer Software in Windows       NOTE  If your printer is not already connected to the  computer  the following window will appear   Ca SC      Connect Device  Setup can not find a connected device  Check connection between your computer and    the printer       Please refer to the following connection method   1  Connect the device to your computer    2  Tum on the power of the device       3  IF  New Hardware Wizard  is appeared  close it   4  Click  Next         lt Back    e After connecting the printer  click Next   e If you don   t want to connect the printer at this time  click       f Cancel             Next  and No on the following screen  Then the installation
111. NTAL  SPECIAL   EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY   WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE  USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com   This product includes software written by Tim  Hudson  tih cryptsoft com      ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE       Copyright  C  1995 1998 Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com  All rights reserved     This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com   The implementation was written so as to conform with  Netscapes SSL     This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to  The following conditions apply  to all code found in this distribution  be it the RC4  RSA  Ihash  DES  etc   code  not just the SSL code  The SSL documentation included with  this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson  tjnh cryptsoft com   Copyright remains Eric  Young s  and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed  If this package is used in a product  Eric Young should be  given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used  This can be in th
112. Press Duplex    3  Press the left right arrow until the binding option you want appears    e Off  Send faxes in Normal mode    e 2Side  Send faxes on both sides of the original    e 2  gt 1Side ROT2  Send faxes on both sides of the original and prints  each one on a separate sheet  but the information on the back side  of the printout is rotated 180      4  Press OK to save your selection   If the mode is enabled  the Duplex button is backlit     RECEIVING A FAX       Selecting the paper tray    After loading the print media for fax output  you have to select the paper tray  you will use for the fax reception     1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Paper Source appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Fax Tray appears and press OK     Press the left right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  press OK     6  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Sem IN    Changing receiving modes  1  Press Fax     2  Press Menu  27  until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK    Press OK when Receive Mode appears    5  Press the left right arrow until the fax reception mode you want appears    e In Fax mode  the machine answers an incoming fax call and  immediately goes into the fax reception mode    e In
113. Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears    3  Press the left right arrow until Date  amp  Time appears and press OK    4  Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad     Month   01 to 12  Day  01to31  Year  requires four digits    Hour 01 to 12  12 hour mode   00 to 23  24 hour mode   Minute   00 to 59    4 The date format may differ from country to country    You can also use the left right arrow to move the cursor under the  digit you want to correct and enter a new number   5  To select AM or PM for 12 hour format  press the    or   button or any  number button   When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator  pressing the    or   button immediately moves the cursor to the indicator   You can change the clock mode to 24 hour format  e g  01 00 PM as  13 00   For details  see the next section   6  Press OK to save the time and date   When you enter a wrong number  Out of Range appears and the  machine does not proceed to the next step  If this happens  simply  reenter the correct number     7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Changing the clock mode   You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12 hour  or 24 hour format    1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press OK when Machine Setup appears    Press the left right arrow until Clock Mode appears and press OK   Press t
114. Press OK when Maintenance appears    Press the left right arrow until Color appears and press OK    Press the left right arrow until the menu you want appears on display   and press OK    e Custom Color  Allows you to adjust contrast color by color  Default  optimizes color automatically  Manual Adjust allows you to  manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge  Default setting  is recommended for getting best color quality    e Auto Color Reg   Allows you to adjust the position of print color  texts or graphics to match the original file on your screen     If you have moved the machine  it is strongly recommended to operate  this menu manually     5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     CLEARING MEMORY       You can selectively clear information stored in your machine s memory     AN For CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX users  before clearing  the memory  make sure that all fax jobs have been completed  or you  will lose those jobs     1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK     2  Press the left right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until the item you want to clear appears     3   Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine                 OPTIONS DESCRIPTION  All Settings Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all  of your settings to the factory default   Fax Setup Restore
115. Rear Cover       Paper has jammed in  the paper rear cover  area        Clear the jam  See page  76     Send Error There is a problemin   Configure the    AUTH  SMTP authentication    authentication setting   Send Error There is a problemin   Configure the DNS   DNS  DNS  setting    Send Error There is a problemin   Configure the POP3   POP3  POP3  setting    Send Error There is a problemin   Change to the available   SMTP  SMTP  server                 80  Troubleshooting          MESSAGE    MEANING    SUGGESTED  SOLUTIONS          Send Error   Wrong Config     There is a problem on  the network interface  card     Configure your network  interface card correctly           Toner Empty  v    A toner cartridge has  almost reached its  estimated cartridge    life    lt 4 Stop  gt     Samsung  does not  recommend  using non   genuine  Samsung  toner cartridge  such as  refilled or  remanufactured   Samsung cannot  guarantee non   genuine Samsung  toner cartridge s  quality  Service or  repair required as a  result of using non   genuine Samsung  toner cartridges will  not be covered under    the machine warranty     You can choose among  Stop  Continue or  Black Only as shown on  the control panel  If you  select Stop  the printer  stops printing and you  cannot print any more  without changing the  cartridge  If you select  Continue  the printer  keeps printing but the  printing quality cannot  be guaranteed  If you  select Black Only  the  machine prints the data  in black only
116. Replace the toner  cartridge  See page 67           Troubleshooting_ 81    SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS       The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  recommended solutions  Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is  corrected  If the problem persists  call for service           Paper feeding  CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam  See page 71     during printing        Paper sticks Ensure there is not too much paper in the tray    together  The tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper   depending on the thickness of your paper    e Make sure that you are using the correct type  of paper  See page 38       Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the  paper    e Humid conditions may cause some paper to  stick together        Multiple sheets of Different types of paper may be stacked in the   paper do not feed  tray  Load paper of only one type  size  and  weight    e If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam   clear the paper jam  See page 71        Paper does not feed Remove any obstructions from inside the   into the machine  machine    e Paper has not been loaded correctly  Remove  paper from the tray and reload it correctly    e There is too much paper in the tray  Remove  excess paper from the tray    e The paper is too thick  Use only paper that  meets the specifications required by the  machine  See page 33    e If an original does not feed into the machine   the DADF  or ADF  rubber pad may require to  be rep
117. Setting print job timeout  Auto continue  Net accounting  Changing the font setting    Loading originals   On the scanner glass   In the DADF  or ADF   Selecting print media   Specifications on print media   Media sizes supported in each mode   Guidelines for special print media  Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray  Loading paper   Loading paper in the tray 1 or optional tray   Loading paper in the multi purpose tray  Adjusting the output support   For Letter sized paper    contents       COPYING    SCANNING    BASIC PRINTING    FAXING    38    51  51    52    For A4  or Legal sized paper  Setting the paper size and type    Selecting the paper tray  Copying  Changing the settings for each copy   Darkness   Original Type   Reduced or enlarged copy  Changing the scan size settings  Changing the default copy settings  ID card copying  Using special copy features   Collation   2 up or 4 up copying   Poster copying   Clone copying   Adjusting background images   Book copying   Margin shift   Edge erase   Gray enhance copying  Printing on both sides of paper  Setting copy timeout    Scanning basics  Scanning from the control panel  Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager   Scanning to application programs  Scanning by a network connection  Preparing for network scanning  Scanning to Email  Scanning to an FTP server  Scanning to an SMB server  Changing the settings for each scan job  Changing the default scan settings  printing scan confirmation report automati
118. Type job  See  Original Type  on page 39  You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a  ID Copy driver s license to a single side of paper  See    page 40        Reduce Enlarge    Makes a copy smaller or larger than the original           Resolution    Adjusts the document resolution for the current  fax job     Allows you to print documents on both sides of          Redial Pause    In ready mode  redials the last number  or in Edit  mode  inserts a pause into a fax number                          Fax Activates Fax mode    Copy Activates Copy mode    Scan Email Activates Scan mode    Display Shows the current status and prompts during an    operation        e  EF  B  VY  B  OG    Toner colors    The toner colors shown below the LCD display  co works with the display messages  See Status  LED with the toner cartridge messages on page  22              Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the    Duplex the paper   Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB  USB Print Memory device when it is inserted into the USB   21  memory port on the front of your machine  See  page 59   Dials a number or enters alphanumeric   22  Number keypad characters  See page 30    23  On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line   Stops an operation at any time  In ready mode   clears cancels the copy options  such as the  StopiClear darkness  the document type setting  the copy  size  and the number of copies   Color Start Starts a job in Color mode   Black Start Starts a job in Black and White m
119. a different name that  is automatically programmed    e Overwrite  You can set the machine to delete previous job  information on HDD as you store new job information    5  Press OK     Deleting residual image data    ImageOverwrite is a security measure for customers who are concerned  about unauthorized access and duplication of classified or private  document     1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until ImageOverwrite appears and press  OK    3  Press the left right arrow until the job setting you want appears and  press OK    e Immediate  All residual image data from the machine will be erased  immediately after each job has been processed    e On Demand  This option provides an on demand facility for a  system administrator to erase all the real image data remained in  HDD after this option enabled  All existing jobs will be deleted  regardless of their status and all job submissions will be prohibited  for the duration of the overwrite    4  Press the left right arrow to move to On or Off for Immediate   Press the left right arrow to move to Enable or Disable for On  Demand    If you selected On Demand enabled  the machine confirms if the   overwrite feature starts now  Press the left right arrow to select  Yes or No  If you select Yes  On Demand overwrite starts as soon  as you select Yes  If you select No  this feature will be enabled     5  Press OK     specifications       Th
120. achine  Sending a fax  using ECM may take more time        Send Report    You can set your machine to print a confirmation  report showing whether a transmission was  successful  how many pages were sent  and  more  The available options are On  Off  and On   Error  which prints only when a transmission is  not successful     Auto Reduction    When receiving a fax containing pages as long as  or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray   the machine can reduce the size of the original to  fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine   Turn on this feature if you want to automatically  reduce an incoming page    With this feature set to Off  the machine cannot  reduce the original to fit onto one page  The  original will be divided and printed in actual size  on two or more pages           Image TCR       This function allows users to know what fax  messages have been sent by showing sent  messages in the transmission report    The first page of the message is turned into an  image file than is printed on the transmission  report so the users can see what messages have  been sent    However  you can not use this function when  sending fax without saving the data in the  memory     Discard Size       When receiving a fax containing pages as long as  or longer than the paper in your machine  you can  set the machine to discard a specific length from  the end of the received fax  The machine will print  the received fax on one or more sheets of paper   minus the data tha
121. ages to align  For the output support to correctly align the    pages  you need to pull it out appropriately depending on the paper size        1 Output support          2 Extension       L e If the output support is incorrectly adjusted  printed pages may be  mis aligned or fall   e If you continuously print many pages  the surface of the output tray  may become hot  Be careful not to touch the surface  and  especially keep out of children   s reach     For Letter sized paper    Pull out the output support to the location indicated LTR as shown  and  unfold the extension        For A4  or Legal sized paper    Pull out the output support to the location indicated A4  LGL as shown  and  unfold the extension        38 _Loading originals and print media       SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE       After loading paper in the paper tray  you need to set the paper size and  type using the control panel buttons  These settings will apply to Copy and  Fax modes  For PC printing  you need to select the paper size and type in  the application program you use on your PC     1  Press Menu  27  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK    3  Press OK when Paper Size appears     4  Press the left right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  press OK     5  Press the left right arrow until the paper size you are using appears and  press OK     Press Back  129  to return to the u
122. al characters  such as space  plus sign  and etc   For details  see the below section    2  To enter additional letters  repeat step 1    If the next letter is printed on the same button  move the cursor by  pressing the right left right arrow button and then press the button  labeled with the letter you want  The cursor will move to the right and  the next letter will appear on the display    You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice     3  When you have finished entering letters  press OK     Getting started 29    Keypad letters and numbers                                     KEY ASSIGNED NUMBERS  LETTERS  OR CHARACTERS  1 1 Space   2 A B Ca b c 2   3 DE F de f 3   4 G H   g hi 4   5 JK Lj k 1 5   6 MN Om no 6   7 P QRS p q r s 7   8 TUV t  v 8   9 WX Y Z w x y z 9   0            Ll   8   O          Correcting numbers or names    If you make a mistake while entering a number or name  press the left  left right arrow button to delete the last digit or character  Then enter the  correct number or character     Inserting a pause    With some telephone systems  you must dial an access code  9  for  example  and listen for a second dial tone  In such cases  you must  insert a pause in the telephone number  You can insert a pause while  you are setting up speed buttons or speed dial numbers    To insert a pause  press Redial Pause at the appropriate place while  entering the telephone number  A   appears on the display at the  corresponding location     Using the save modes    Po
123. an also click it on the status  bar  in Mac OS X      Double click this icon in Windows    SHO  11 09PM  Click this icon in Mac OS X   o 4   Click this icon in Linux     If you are a Windows user  from the Start menu  select  Programs or All Programs   your printer driver name  gt   Smart Panel     Using Smart Panel    30       NOTE     e If you have already installed more than one Samsung  printer  first select the printer model you want in order to  use the corresponding Smart Panel  Right click  in Windows  or Linux  or click  in Mac OS X  the Smart Panel icon and  select your printer name    e The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this  Software User s Guide may differ depending on the printer  or Operating System in use        The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the  printer  the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s   and various other information  You can also change settings     Read   2    ill S Buy Now   CM ubleshooting Guide  Ub g       A  pa rinter Settin  Ng mi      Ca Driver Setting                     Toner Level   You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner  cartridge s   The printer and the number of toner cartridge s   shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in  use  Any printers do not have this feature     Buy Now  You can order replacement toner cartridge s  online     Troubleshooting Guide  You can view Help to solve problems     Printer Setting  You can configure various printer 
124. ancel     Z You can also access this window by simply double clicking the printer  icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop     You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop Clear on the control  panel     50 _Basic printing       Canceling a print job       faxing    The fax feature is available only on the CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX  This chapter gives you information about using    your machine as a fax machine     This chapter includes     e Sending a fax  e Receiving a fax    You cannot use this machine as a fax machine via the internet  phone     We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services  PSTN   public switched telephone network  when connecting telephone lines  to use Fax  If you use other Internet services  DSL  ISDN  VoIP   you  can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter  The  Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves  connection quality or Internet quality  Since the DSL Micro filter is not  provided with the machine  contact your Internet Service provider for  use on DSL Micro filter     LINE EXT      1  Fl A                            1 Line port  2 Micro filter  3 DSL modem   Telephone line             SENDING A FAX    e Other ways to fax  e Fax setup    quality  or contain photographs  you can adjust the resolution to produce   a higher quality Fax    1  Press Resolution    2  Press Resolution or the left right arrow until the option you want  appears    3  Press OK to save your 
125. and search timeout     moe oN    L  LDAP Referral  LDAP client will search referral server in case  LDAP server has no data to reply of query and LDAP server has  any referral server     10  Select Serach Name Order that you want   11  Put a check mark of  From   Field Security Options     48 Scanning       12  Click Add     Using Address Book entries  To retrieve an email address  use the following ways     Speed email numbers    When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an   email  enter the speed email number at which you stored the address   you want    e Fora one digit speed email location  press and hold the  corresponding digit button from the number keypad    e Fora two  or three digit speed email location  press the first digit  button s  and then hold down the last digit button     If you are an CLX 6200FX user  you can also press the speed buttons at  which you stored the address you want     You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address  Book  See page 48   Group email numbers    To use a group email entry  you need to search for and select it from  memory     When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an  email  press Address Book  See page 48  Global email addresses    To use a global email addresses in the LDAP server  you need to search  for and select it from memory     When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an  email  press Address Book  See page 48     Searchi
126. and so  forth  IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of  printers  and also supports access control  authentication  and  encryption  making it a much more capable and secure printing solution  than older ones     IPX SPX    IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet  Exchange  It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare  operating systems  IPX and SPX both provide connection services  similar to TCP IP  with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP  and  SPX having similarities to TCP  IPX SPX was primarily designed for  local area networks  LANs   and is a very efficient protocol for this  purpose  typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN      ISO    The International Organization for Standardization  ISO  is an  international standard setting body composed of representatives from  national standards bodies  It produces world wide industrial and  commercial standards     ITU T    The International Telecommunication Union is an international  organization established to standardize and regulate international radio  and telecommunications  Its main tasks include standardization   allocation of the radio spectrum  and organizing interconnection  arrangements between different countries to allow international phone  calls  A  T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication     ITU T No  1 chart   Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile  transmissions    JBIG    Joint Bi level Image Experts G
127. another job    6  Press OK when Yes appears to print another job  and repeat from step 2   Otherwise  press the left right arrow to select No and press OK    7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode    Z Can choose paper size and tray when printing  See  Setting the paper   size and type  on page 38     BACKING UP DATA       Data in the machine   s memory can be accidentally erased due to power  failure or storage failure  Backup helps you protect your Address Book  entries and the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB  memory device   CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only     Backing up data  1  Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  machine   2  Press Menu  37  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK   Press OK when Machine Setup appears   Press the left right arrow until Export Setting appears and press OK   5  Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears   e Address Book  Backs up all Address Book entries   e Setup Data  Backs up all system settings     6  Press OK to begin backing up the data   The data is backed up to the USB memory     7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     BO    Restoring data   1  Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to  the USB memory port    2  Press Menu  3  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the   display and press OK    Press OK when Machine Setup appears    Press the left right arrow until Impor
128. any document  Overlays are often used to take the place of  preprinted forms and letterhead paper  Rather than using    preprinted letterhead  you can create an overlay containing the    exact same information that is currently on your letterhead  To  print a letter with your company   s letterhead  you do not need  to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer  You need  only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your  document     Creating a New Page Overlay    To use a page overlay  you must create a new page overlay  containing your logo or image     1    ur W N    YO    Create or open a document containing text or an image for    use in a new page overlay  Position the items exactly as  you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay    To save the document as an overlay  access printer  properties  See    Printing a Document    on page 14    Click the Extras tab  and click Edit button in the Overlay  section    In the Edit Overlay window  click Create Overlay    In the Create Overlay window  type a name of up to eight    characters in the File name box  Select the destination  path  if necessary   The default is C  Formover      Click Save  The name appears on the Overlay List box   Click OK or Yes to finish creating     The file is not printed  Instead it is stored on your  computer hard disk drive        NOTE  The overlay document size must be the same as the  documents you print with the overlay  Do not create an  overlay with a watermark       
129. aper transfer belt first   Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt     4  Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt   Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt  lift it out of the machine        64 _Maintenance       5  With a dry lint free cloth  wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the  toner cartridges area and their cavities        N If toner gets on your clothing  wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  it in cold water  Hot water sets toner into fabric     6  Locate the long strip of glass  LSU  inside the cartridge compartment   and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white cotten black              7  Reinstall all the compartments into the machine  and close the front  cover     A If the front cover is not completely closed  the machine will not  operate     8  Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on    Cleaning the scan unit   Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies  We  suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the  day  as needed    1  Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water    2  Open the scanner lid     3  Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF  or ADF  glass until it  is clean and dry        1 Scanner lid       2 Scanner glass       3 White sheet       4 DADF  or ADF   glass          4  Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean  and dry     5  Close the scanner lid    
130. ard pages  Black    e Average continuous  colored cartridge yield   2 000 standard pages   Yellow Magenta Cyan     CLP K660A  Black   CLP C660A  Cyan   CLP M660A  Magenta   CLP Y660A  Yellow        Paper transfer Approx  50 000 CLP T660B  belt When the transfer belt has  worn out with abrasion  you  need to change it  By this  time you may be notified with  the transfer belt related  message on the display              a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798     A When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies  these must  be purchased in the same country where the machine was  purchased  Otherwise  print cartridges or other supplies will be  incompatible with your machine  as configurations of print cartridges  and other supplies vary  depending on the specific country        e How to purchase    ACCESSORIES       You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s  performance and capacity        ACCESSORY    DESCRIPTION    PART NUMBER       Memory module    Extends your  machine s memory  capacity     e CLX 6200 Series  CLP MEM201  128 MB  CLP MEM202  256 MB   e CLX 6240 Series  CLP MEM101  128 MB  CLP MEM102  256 MB  CLP MEM103  512 MB       Optional tray 2    If you are  experiencing  frequent paper  supply problems   you can attach an  additional 500 sheet  tray  You can print  documents in  various sizes and  types of print  materials     CLX S6240A       IEEE 802 11b g  Wireless LAN card   CLX 6200ND  CLX   6210FX  CLX   6240FX o
131. ard typed or printed originals    e Dark  Works well with light print    e Darkest  Works well with lighter print or faint pencil markings     Original Type  The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the  document type for the current copy job     To select the document type  press Original Type  Each time you press the  button  the following modes are available     e Text  Use for originals containing mostly text    e Text Photo  Use for originals with mixed text and photographs   e Photo  Use when the originals are photographs    e Magazine  Use when the originals are magazines     Reduced or enlarged copy    By using the Reduce Enlarge button  you can reduce or enlarge the size of  a copied image from 25  to 400  when you copy original documents from  the scanner glass  or from 25  to 100  from the DADF  or ADF      To select from the predefined copy sizes   1  Press Reduce Enlarge     2  Press Reduce Enlarge or the left right arrow until the size setting  you want appears and press OK     To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate     1  Press Reduce Enlarge    2  Press Reduce Enlarge or the left right arrow until Custom appears  and press OK    3  Enter the scale rate and press OK to save the selection     When you make a reduced copy  black lines may appear at the  bottom of your copy     Copying_ 39    CHANGING THE SCAN SIZE SETTINGS    You can adjust the scan size for the original paper  For example  if you scan   a A4 sized
132. b Type drop   down list    2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window   the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan  job    To delete a Job Type setting    1 Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type  drop down list    2 Click Delete     The setting is deleted from the list    PWN Pe    Using the I mage Manager    The Image Manager application provides you with menu  commands and tools to edit your scanned image                 Use these tools to  edit the image           You can use the following tools to edit the image     Tools Function                      H Saves the image     Save    a Cancels your last action   Undo       E Restores the action you canceled   Redo          ky Allows you to scroll through the image     Scroll  NG  Crops the selected image area   Crop            a Zooms the image out   Zoom Qut     x Zooms the image in   Zoom In       Allows you to scale the image size  you can  enter the size manually  or set the rate to   Scale scale proportionally  vertically  or  horizontally        Allows you to rotate the image  you can    br     select the number of degrees from the drop                down list        a Allows you to flip the image vertically or       Flip     horizontally        Allows you to adjust the brightness or  a   contrast of the image  or to invert the    Effect image           a  Shows the properties of the image   Properties          For further details about the Image Manager application  refer  
133. b browser  such as Internet Explorer  from Windows     2  Enter the machine IP address  http   xxx xxx xxx xxx  in the address  field and press the Enter key or click Go   Your machine   s embedded website opens     CHECKING THE MACHINE   S SERIAL NUMBER       When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website  the  machine   s serial number may be required   You can check the serial number by taking the following steps     1  Press Menu  f3  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Serial Number appears and press OK   Check your machine   s serial number    Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode      OT  a oN       troubleshooting    This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error     This chapter includes     e Tips for avoiding paper jams  e Clearing document jams  e Clearing paper jams    TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS       By selecting the correct media types  most paper jams can be avoided    When a paper jam occurs  follow the steps outlined on page 71    e Follow the procedures on page 36  Ensure that the adjustable guides  are positioned correctly    e Donot overload the tray  Ensure that the paper level is below the paper   capacity mark on the inside of the tray    Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing    Flex  fan  and straighten paper before loading
134. c OS X 10 5    Intel Processor   512 MB  1 GB  1 GB  e 867 MHz or  faster Power  PC G4  G5                Linux       ITEM REQUIREMENTS       Operating system   RedHat 8 0  9 0  32bit    RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4  5  32 64bit   Fedora Core 1 7  32 64bit    Mandrake 9 2  32bit   10 0  10 1  32 64bit   Mandriva 2005  2006  2007  32 64bit    SuSE Linux 8 2  9 0  9 1  32bit    SuSE Linux 9 2  9 3  10 0  10 1  10 2  32 64bit   SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9  10  32 64bit   Ubuntu 6 06  6 10  7 04  32 64bit    Debian 3 1  4 0  32 64bit        CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz  IntelCore2        RAM 512 MB  1024 MB           Free HDD space 1 GB  2GB        L  e Itis necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for  working with large scanned images   e The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at  maximum     INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE       You have to install the machine software for printing  The software includes  drivers  applications  and other user friendly programs     KY  e The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as  a network machine  If you want to connect a machine with a USB  cable  refer to Software section    e The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating  system  The procedure and popup window which appear during  the installation may differ depending on the operating system  the  printer feature  or the interface in use     1  Connect the network cable to your machine    2  Make sure that the network setup for your 
135. cally  Setting up Address Book  Registering speed email numbers  Configuring group email numbers  Retrieving global email addresses from the LDAP server  Using Address Book entries  Searching Address Book for an entry  Printing Address Book  Scan on both sides of paper    Printing a document  Canceling a print job    Sending a fax  Setting the fax header  Adjusting the document settings  Sending a fax automatically    Contents 15    contents       16 Contents    USING USB FLASH MEMORY    MAINTENANCE    52  52  52  52  52  52  52  52  53    53  53  53  53    54  54  54  54  55  55  56  56    57  57    Sending a fax manually  Confirming a transmission  Automatic redialing  Redialing the last number  Sending faxes on both sides of paper  Receiving a fax  Selecting the paper tray  Changing receiving modes  Receiving automatically in Fax mode  Receiving manually in Tel mode  Receiving manually using an extension telephone  Receiving automatically in Ans Fax mode  Receiving faxes using DRPD mode  Receiving in secure receiving mode  Activating secure receiving mode  Receiving faxes in memory  Other ways to fax  Sending a fax to multiple destinations  Sending a delayed fax  Sending a priority fax  Forwarding faxes  Fax setup  Changing the fax setup options  Changing the default document settings  Printing sent fax report automatically  Setting up Address Book    About USB memory  Plugging in a USB memory device  Scanning to a USB memory device  Scanning  Customizing Scan to USB  Prin
136. can choose from None  Reduce    Enlarge  and Fit to Page    e For details  see    Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document    on  page 21    e For details  see    Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper  Size    on page 21     Graphics Tab    Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for    your specific printing needs  See    Printing a Document    on  page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties     Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below                                       amp  Printing Preferences PR   Layout   Paper   Graphic   Extras   About  Quality  O Best  S   Ofioimal S  Color Mode  a    Color    j   O Grayscale  Manual Letter  8 50 x 11 00 in  O mm   inch  Copies  1  Quality  Normal  Favorites  Printer Default v  Advanced Options  P nos  OK Cancel Help     Quality    The Quality options you can select may vary depending    on your printer model  The higher the setting  the sharper the  clarity of printed characters and graphics  The higher setting also    may increase the time it takes to print a document     Color Mode    You can choose color options  Setting to Color typically produces  the best possible print quality for color documents  If you want to    print a color document in grayscale  select Grayscale  If you  want to adjust the color options manually  select Manual and       after printing a document  you find that the fonts did not print  correctly  choose Download as bit image and resubmit your
137. cript version 7 xx  when the base color  space of the document is indexed RGB color  space and it is converted through CIE color  space  Because Postscript uses CIE color  space for Color Matching System  you should  upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least  GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later  You can  find recent Ghostscript versions at  www ghostscript com        The machine does  not print whole pages  and its output is half  page printed     It is a known problem that occurs when a color  printer is used on version 8 51 or earlier of  Ghostscript  64 bit Linux OS  and reported to  bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug  688252    The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v   8 52 or above  Download the latest version of  AFPL Ghostscript from http   sourceforge net   projects ghostscript  and install it to solve this  problem          cannot scan via  Gimp Front end     e Check if Gimp Front end has    Xsane  Device  dialog     on the    Acquire    menu  If not  you  should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the  your computer  You can find Xsane plug in  package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or  Gimp home page  For the detail information   refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or  Gimp Front end application    If you wish to use other kind of scan application    refer to the Help for application          encounter error     Cannot open port  device file    when  printing a document        Avoid changing print job parameters  via LPR  GUI  for example  
138. cross the sheet of  paper and can then be taped together to form a poster  See  Software section    You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain  paper  See Software section     Save time and money    To save paper  you can print multiple pages on one single  sheet of paper    This machine automatically conserves electricity by  substantially reducing power consumption when not in use   To save paper  you can print on both sides of the paper   double sided printing   See Software section     2 Features of your new laser product    a    Expand your machine s capacity   e Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their  memory   Page 91    e Zoran IPS Emulation  compatible with PostScript 3  PS   enables PS printing          Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3       Copyright 1995 2005  Zoran Corporation  All rights reserved   Zoran  the Zoran logo  IPS PS3  and Onelmage are  trademarks of Zoran Corporation       136 PS3 fonts  Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc                                      tert B  EEEE  ag                   Print in various environments   e You can print with Windows 2000 and Windows XP 2003   Vista as well as Linux and Macintosh systems    e Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a  network interface     Copy originals in several formats   e Your machine can print multiple image copies from the  original document on a single page    e There are special functions to erase catalog and  newspaper
139. d  select Forward amp Print     Enter your email address and press OK   8  Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK     DM a    N    Faxing_ 55    FAX SETUP    9  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode   Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email    address        Changing the fax setup options    Your machine provides you with various user selectable options for setting  up the fax system  You can change the default settings for your preferences    and needs   To change the fax setup options     1   2     3     Press Fax     Press Menu  13  until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK     Press the left right arrow to select Sending or Receiving and press OK     Press the left right arrow until the menu item you want appears and    press OK     Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears or enter the  value for the option you have selected  and press OK     If necessary  repeat steps 4 through 5   Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Sending options       OPTION    DESCRIPTION       Dial Mode    This setting may not be available depending on  your country  If you cannot reach this option  your  machine does not support this feature    You can set the dial mode for your machine to  either tone dialling or pulse dialling  If you have a  public telephone system or a private branch  exchnage PBX  system  you may need to select  Pulse  Contact your local telephone company if  you ar
140. d decimal notation or as a host name   4  Enter the server port number  from 1 to 65535   The default port number is 88   5  You can add a backup domain as a previous step   6  Click Apply     Network user authorized by SMB  1  Enter the domain that is used for SMB login   2  Select IP Address or Host Name   3  Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name   4  Enter the server port number  from 1 to 65535   The default port number is 139   5  You can add a backup domain as a previous step   6  Click Apply     6G User can add up to 6 alternate domains     Network authorized user by LDAP    1  Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  Go to access the web site of your machine     Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup    Select IP Address or Host Name    Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name    Enter the server port number  from 1 to 65535    The default port number is 389    6  Enter Search Root Directory  the top search level of the LDAP  directory tree    7  Select Authentication method  Two options for LDAP server login    Anonymous  This is used to bind with null password and login ID    a RoN    Scanning_ 45     Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS      Simple  This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS     8  Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN     9  Select Match User s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute   options are CN  UID  or UserPrincipalName      1
141. d the Bonjour   The name of your machine appears on the list  Select    SECOOOxxxxxxxxx from the printer box  where the  XXXXXXXXX varies depending on your machine     5 For MAC OS 10 3  if Auto Select does not work properly   select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer  name in Model Name    e For MAC OS 10 4  if Auto Select does not work properly   select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name  in Model    e For MAC OS 10 5  if Auto Select does not work properly   select Select a driver to use    and your printer name  in Print Using    Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the   default printer     6 Click Add     Using Your Printer with a Macintosh    For a USB connected    1 Follow the instructions on    Installing Software    on page 41  to install the PPD file on your computer     2 Open the Applications folder  gt  Utilities  and Print  Setup Utility   e For MAC OS 10 5  open System Preferences from the  Applications folder  and click Printer  amp  Fax   3 Click Add on the Printer List   e For MAC OS 10 5  press the         icon then a display  window will pop up   4 For MAC OS 10 3  select the USB tab      For MAC OS 10 4  click Default Browser and find the  USB connection    For MAC OS 10 5  click Default and find the USB  connection   5 Select your printer name     6 For MAC OS 10 3  if Auto Select does not work properly   select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer  name in Model Name                                                
142. device will void the authorization to use  it  Contact manufacturer for service     FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use     While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW cm2 may be exceeded at  distances close to the antenna installed  Therefore  the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times  This  device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna     8 Safety information    FAX BRANDING       The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any  message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or  on the first page of the transmission the following information     1  the date and time of transmission    2  identification of either business  business entity or individual sending the message  and    3  telephone number of either the sending machine  business  business entity or individual    The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities  equipment operations or procedures where such action is  reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68  If such changes can  be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications faciliti
143. dow does not appear  click Start and  then Run  Type X   Setup exe  replacing    X    with the  letter which represents your drive and click OK    If you use Windows Vista  click Start     All programs  gt   Accessories     Run  and type X   Setup exe    If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista  click  Run Setup exe in I nstall or run program field  and  click Continue in the User Account Control window     Click Next   Ee         It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before  running Setup        Select a language from the list below     SAMSUNG English zl  Cancel    e If necessary  select a language from the drop down list                 4 Select Custom installation  Click Next      x     Select Installation Type       Select type that you want and click  Next  button     c apenas Wa Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s    computer    cC Typical installation for a    network printer Install software for a device that is on network  Wired or Wireless       Custom installation    You can select installation options  This option is recommended for    professional users      lt Back Cancel             Installing Printer Software in Windows    5 Select your printer and click Next  i 6 Select the components to be installed and click Next                                                                    Select Printer Port a    i Select components that you would like to install em     Select a port that wi
144. e  the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area    e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt    e If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes  the  OPC drum can be exposed to light  This will cause damage to the  OPC drum  Close the front cover should the installation need to  be halted for any reason       Close the front cover firmly  The machine will resume printing     A If the front cover is not completely closed  the machine will not  operate     In the fuser unit area    If paper is jammed in the fuser unit area  follow the next steps to release the  jammed paper     1  Open the scan unit        3  Open the inner cover using the handle on it and carefully take the  jammed paper out of the machine        Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover  It is hot and could  cause burns  The fuser s operating temperature is 180  C  356  F    Take care when removing paper from the machine        4  Pull up the paper jam lever to loose the fusing part of the fuser unit and  carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine        a    Press down the paper jam lever to fasten the fusing part   Close the inner cover     7  Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely  closed  Make sure that it is securely latched   Be careful not to pinch your fingers     D       AN If the scan unit is not completely closed  the machine will not  operate     Troubleshooting 75    In the paper exit area   If
145. e Capture operates  propery in Mac OS 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS 10 4 7 or  higher        Setting scan information in Scan  Manager     You can find out about Scan Manager program information  and installed scan driver s condition  Also  you can change scan  settings and add or delete the folders where scanned  documents to computer are save in Scan Manager program     1 Open Scan Manager in Smart Panel menu on Status  bar     2 Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving  destination and scan settings  add or delete application  program and format files  You can change the scanning  machine by using Change port   Local or Network     3 Press OK after setting is done     Using Your Printer with a Macintosh    SOFTWARE SECTION      NDEX    A    advanced printing  use 19    B  booklet printing 20    C    canceling  scan 29  Color 17    D    document  print  Macintosh 44  Windows 14   double sided printing 21    Extras properties  set 17    F    favorites settings  use 18    G    Graphics 17  Graphics properties  set 17    H  help  use 18  24    install  printer driver    Macintosh 41 42  Windows 5    installing  Linux software 32    L    Layout properties  set  Windows 15  Linux  driver  install 32  orientation  print 38  paper size  set  print 38  paper source  set 38  paper type  set  print 38  print resolution 38    printer properties 37  printing 37  resolution   printing 38  scanning 38    M    Macintosh  driver  install 41  42  uninstall 41  printing 44  scanning 47 
146. e appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    5  Press the left right arrow until Multi Send appears and press OK    6  Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK   You can use speed buttons  speed dial numbers  You can enter Group  Dial Number using Address Book Button  For details  see page 57    7  Enter the second fax number and press OK     The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document     8  To enter more fax numbers  press OK when Yes appears and repeat  steps 6 and 7  You can add up to 10 destinations     Z Once you entered a group dial number  you cannot enter another  group dial numbers anymore     54 _Faxing       9  When you have finished entering fax numbers  press the left right arrow  to select No at the Another No   prompt and press OK   The original is scanned into memory before transmission  The display  shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in  memory     10  If an original is placed on the scanner glass  select Yes to add another  pages  Load another original and press OK   When you have finished  select No at the Another Page  prompt   The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the  order in which you entered them     Sending a delayed fax   You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be   present  You cannot send a color fax using this feature    1  Press Fax    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a s
147. e control panel then  the scanned data  will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder  When  the setup installation is completed  then you have installed the  Samsung Scan Manager on your computer already  This feature can  be used via the local connection or the network connection  See next  section    e TWAIN  TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications  Scanning an  image launches the selected application  enabling you to control the  scanning process  See the Software section  This feature can be used  via the local connection or the network connection  See Software  section    e Samsung SmarThru Office   This feature is the accompanying  software for your machine  You can use this program to scan images or  documents  and this feature can be used via the local connection or the  network connection  See Software section    e WIA  WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition  To use this feature  your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB  cable  See Software section    e Email  You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email   See page 46     e FTP  You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server  See page 47     e SMB  You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB  server  See page 47     44 Scanning       e Changing the default scan settings    Setting up Address Book    Scan on both sides of paper    SCANNING FROM THE CONTROL PANEL       Your machine offers you to scan from the control panel a
148. e form of a textual message at program startup or in  documentation  online or textual  provided with the package     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met   1  Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer     2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution     3  All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement   This product includes  cryptographic software written by Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com   The word  cryptographic  can be left out if the rouines from the library  being used are not cryptographic related       4  If you include any Windows specific code  or a derivative thereof  from the apps directory  application code  you must include an  acknowledgement   This product includes software written by Tim Hudson  tjh cryptsoft com      THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG    AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED  TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT  SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR  CONSEQUENTIA
149. e not sure which dial mode to use    If you select Pulse  some phone system features  might not be available  It can also take longer to  dial a fax or phone number        Receiving options       OPTION    DESCRIPTION       Receive Mode    You can select the default fax receiving mode  For  details on receiving faxes in each mode  see page  52        Ring to Answer    You can specify the number of times the machine  rings before answering an incoming call           OPTION    DESCRIPTION       Redial Times    You can specify the number of redial attempts  If  you enter 0  the machine will not redial           Redial Term    Your machine can automatically redial a remote  fax machine if it was busy  You can set an interval  between attempts     Stamp RCV This option allows the machine to automatically   Name print the page number  and the date and time of  reception at the bottom of each page of a  received fax    Rev Start Code This code allows you to initiate fax reception from    an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket  on the back of the machine  If you pick up the  extension phone and hear fax tones  enter the  code  It is preset to  9  at the factory           Prefix Dial    You can set a prefix of up to five digits  This  number dials before any automatic dial number is  started  It is useful for accessing a PABX  exchange        ECM Mode    This mode helps with poor line quality and makes  sure any faxes you send are sent smoothly to any  other ECM equipped fax m
150. e parts   Managing your machine from the website  Checking the machine   s serial number       REPORTILIST DESCRIPTION       NetScan Report This report shows information for the Network Scan    records including IP address  time and date  the  number of pages scanned  and results  This report is  automatically printed every 50 network scan jobs                    User Auth List This list shows authorized users who are allowed to  use the email function    PCL Font List You can print the PCL font list    PS3 Font List You can print the PS3 font list    Stored Job This list shows the current status of stored job on  HDD    Completed Job The Completed Job page shows the list of    completed print jobs  The list contains up to 50 files  from the latest print jobs        Net Auth Log This list shows users and their IDs who logged in    the domain           Printing a report    1     2   3     Press Menu  33  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Report appears and press OK    Press the left right arrow until the report or list you want to print appears  and press OK    To print all reports and lists  select All Report    Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing    The selected information prints out     ADJUSTING THE COLOR CONTRAST       Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting     1     2   3   4     Press Menu  73  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the   display and press OK    
151. e the firewall on Update    this PC before continuing with the installation     Set IP Address  lt Back Next gt  Cancel    e If you do not see your printer on the list  click Update to  refresh the list  or select Add TCP  IP Port to add your  printer to the network  To add the printer to the  network  enter the port name and the IP address for the                      10    printer     To verify your printer   s IP address or the MAC address   print a Network Configuration page in machine       To find a shared network printer  UNC Path   select  Shared Printer  UNC  and enter the shared name  manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  button        NOTE  If you cannot find your machine in network  please turn  off the firewall and click Update    For Windows operating system  click Start     Control Panel  and start windows firewall  and set this option unactivated   For other operating system  refer to its on line guide           Tip  If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific  network printer  click the Set IP Address button  The Set IP  Address window appears  Do as follows     Set IP Address am        You can set or change IP address for the network printer             Printer Name IP Address MAC Address       sil fl                         Information Tupas    Printer MAC Address   aa  IP Address   DH  Subnet Mask  IPE Configure  Default Gateway   ayam   lt Back Cancel  a  Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the    list
152. ean States qualified under wireless approvals    EU Austria  Belgium  Cyprus  Czech Republic  Denmark  Estonia  Finland  France  with frequency restrictions    Germany  Greece  Hungary  Ireland  Italy  Latvia  Lithuania  Luxembourg  Malta  The Netherlands  Poland   Portugal  Slovakia  Slovenia  Spain  Sweden and the U K     EEA EFTA countries Iceland  Liechtenstein  Norway and Switzerland   European States with restrictions on use    EU In France  the frequency range is restricted to 2446 5 2483 5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power  such as wireless   EEA EFTA countries No limitations at this time     REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS       Wireless Guidance    Low power  Radio LAN type devices  radio frequency  RF  wireless communication devices   operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band  may be  present  embedded  in your printer system  The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device   Additional limitations  cautions  and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections  or country group sections   The  wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label  If  the country you will be using the wireless device in  is not listed  contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements  Wireless devices  are closely regulated and use may not be allowed    The power output of the wireless device or devices 
153. earing the Toner Empty message   When the Toner Empty message appears you can configure not to see this   message again not to disturb you    1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press the Scroll buttons until Maintenance appears and press OK    3  Press the Scroll buttons until CLR Empty Msg  appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the color menu you want appears on  display and press OK     5  Select On and press OK     68 Maintenance       6  Now the Toner Empty message does not appear but the Replace  Toner message will remain for reminding you that the new cartridge  needs to be installed for quality     A   Once you have selected On  this setting will be permanently  written to the memory of the toner cartridge  and this menu will be  disappeared from the Maintenance menu    e You can keep printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed  and  the product support is no longer provided     REPLACING THE PAPER TRANSFER BELT       The life of the paper transfer belt is approximately 50 000 black and color   pages  After the life span of the paper transfer belt is complete  you have to   replace it    e The transfer belt related message appears on the display  telling it is  time for a replacement    e The SmartPanel program window appears on the computer telling you  the paper transfer belt needs to be replaced     Z The life span of the paper transfer belt may be affected by operating  enviro
154. ears asking  you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  Samsung  If you so desire  select the corresponding  checkbox es  and click Finish     Otherwise  just click Finish           Setup Completed    On line Registration     You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips  and promotions  Also you will get more customer care     Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership     T Wes  Id like to register it       JT I d like to print a test page                    NOTE  After setup is complete  if your printer driver doesn t  work properly  reinstall the printer driver  See    Reinstalling  Printer Software    on page 11        Custom Installation    You can choose individual components to install and set a  specific IP address     1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  and powered on  For details about connecting to the  network  see the supplied printer s User s Guide     2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive   The CD ROM should automatically run  and an installation  window appears   If the installation window does not appear  click Start and  then Run  Type X   Setup exe  replacing    X    with the  letter which represents your drive and click OK   If you use Windows Vista  click Start     All programs  gt   Accessories     Run  and type X   Setup exe   If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista  click  Run Setup 
155. ener ened 21    Using Watermarks  nananana paNIRA AANGAL KANA AAANALANND ARI AANG PERA cates NAA RA AN NAA nee 22    Using an Existing Watermark                  asaan asana En rte ann KAN nt 22  Creating a Watermark mna sapakan ahalana a paaa a NAL a aha 22  Editing a Watermark              2 asana na ana na NAN GN GANANG NG NNN GN NN NENA N ANNA NANANA ENGAGE AN ANANEREREN NN NEN GN KA NANANG eae  22  Deleting a Watermark              2 aa asana nee etait 22  Using OVErAYS  anakan LANGAN a ABANGAN DAA NASA NANANA 23  What is an Overlay  pahanap kd Nabaasa balana pb nn mapa PA Ap a hn banas 23  Creating a New Page Overlay                2 aasaasasananan an nananana REN ER EE NE NER GA NANANG NENER EAGER KN KNCn0n 0n nananana 23  Usingi a Page Overlay sesine aE aa EEA EE EA EEE EAE AE EEEE EEE EE EEEE 23  Deleting  a Page  Overlay aaa ma ANA KANG AA AA 23    Chapter 4  USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRI VER    Printer Settings cisini a a tee PB a aa tide 24     Ce AA 24  Using Help mamana RADAR a e ciaa vivant NATIN EEE EEN aA NANG 24    Chapter 5  USING DIRECT PRINTING UTILITY    Overview Direct Printing Utility               asana eee rS A KE eee needed ea KANONG 25  PRIACING  AA AA AA AA AA 25  From the Direct Printing Utility window               2 masa san an anan teeta 25  Using the ShOrtcut icon  pamana sabak aaa haaa Ana DBA AA AA AA ie 25  Using the  right click MENU aaa NANANA NAAN e a chit owas Me ae EE E EAE 25    Chapter 6  SHARING THE PRINTER LOCALLY    Setting Up a H
156. ent copy paper  jams occur        Fan the stack of paper  then turn it over in  the tray  Replace the paper in the tray with  a fresh supply  Check adjust the paper  guides  if necessary    e Ensure that the paper is the proper paper  weight  75 g m   20 Ib bond  paper is  recommended    e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy  paper remaining in the machine after a  paper jam has been cleared              If the printed paper is curled or paper does not   feed into the machine      Turn over the stack of paper in the tray   Also try rotating the paper 180   in the tray       Change the printer option and try again  Go  to printer properties  click Paper tab  and  set type to Thin Paper  Refer to the  Software section for details     Toner cartridge  produces fewer  copies than expected  before running out of  toner        e Your originals may contain pictures  solids   or heavy lines  For example  your originals  may be forms  newsletters  books  or other  documents that use more toner      The machine may be turned on and off  frequently       The scanner lid may be left open while  copies are being made           An unknown image  repetitively appears  on a next few  sheets or loose  toner  light print  or  contamination  occurs        Your printer is probably being used at an  altitude of 1 000 m  3 281 ft  or above    The high altitude may affect the print quality  such as loose toner or light imaging  You can  set this option through Printer Settings Utility  or Printe
157. er    on page 21     Paper Tab    Use the following options to set the basic paper handling  specifications when you access the printer properties  See     Printing a Document    on page 14 for more information on  accessing printer properties     Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties     ry Printing Preferences laka                      Layout  Paper   Graphic   Extras   About  Copies  1 999  i g  Paper Options Ss  Size Letter bd  Custom  Source Auto Selection M  Type Printer Default v  First Page None G  Letter  Scaling Printing 8 50x11 00in  Printing Type None v O mm      inch  Copies  1  Quality  Normal  Favorites  Printer Default v  2T        OK    Cancel    Hep          Copies  Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed   You can select 1 to 999 copies     Paper Options    Size   Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray    If the required size is not listed in the Size box  click Custom   When the Custom Paper Setting window appears  set the paper  size and click OK  The setting appears in the list so that you can  select it     Source   Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray   Use Multi Purpose Tray when printing on special materials like  envelopes and transparencies  You have to load one sheet at a  time into the Manual Tray or Multi Purpose Tray    If the paper source is set to Auto Selection  the printer  automatically picks up print material in the following tray order   Manual Tray 
158. er  referring to  printed  installed correctly  Software section    e Print a configuration page  and verify that the PS  version is available for  printing    e If the problem persists   contact a service  representative       Limit Check The print job was You might need to reduce the  Error    message too complex  complexity of the page or  appears  install more memory        A PostScript  error page prints     The print job may  not be PostScript     Make sure that the print job is  a PostScript job  Check to  see whether the software  application expected a setup  or PostScript header file to be  sent to the machine        The optional tray  is not selected in  the driver        The printer driver  has not been  configured to  recognize the  optional tray     Open the PostScript driver  properties  select the Device  Settings tab  and set the Tray  option of the Installable  Options section to Installed           88 Troubleshooting       document in setting in the setting in your printer driver  Macintosh with printer driver may   matches the one in Acrobat  Acrobat not be matched Reader   Reader 6 0 or with the one in  higher  colors Acrobat Reader   print incorrectly   Common Windows problems  CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS     File in Use    Exit all software applications  Remove all    message appears  during installation     software from the StartUp Group  then restart  Windows  Reinstall the printer driver           General Protection  Fault        Exception  OE    
159. er be used for Scan glass or DADF   or ADF  depending on the set up    Auto Center  Scanner glass   Custom Margin  Scanner glass  DADF  or ADF                 1  Press Copy       2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place TG  a single original face down on the scanner glass  y  For details about loading an original  see page 32  LAN   3  Press Menu  7  until Copy Feature appears on the     bottom line of the display and press OK    4  Press OK when Margin Shift appears              5  Press the left right arrow until the binding option you  want appears     e Off  This feature is disabled   e Auto Center  Automatically copy in the center of the paper     Copying_ 41    e Custom Margin  Enter the left  right  top  bottom margin using  Number keypad   6  Press the left right arrow to select Yes   7  Press OK to begin copying   8  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Edge erase    Edge erase allows you to erase sports  drill holes  fold creases and staple  marks along any of the four edges of a document     L  The Edge Erase feature can either be used for scan glass or DADF  or  ADF  depending on the set up    Small Original  Scanner glass   Hole Punch  Scanner glass  DADF  or ADF    Book Center  Scanner glass   Border Erase  Scanner glass  DADF  or ADF     1  Press Copy    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place  a single original face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32    3  Press Menu  23  
160. erating system you are using     All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning  installation     Installing Software for Local Printing    A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer  using the printer cable supplied with your printer  such as a  USB or parallel cable  If your printer is attached to a network   skip this step and go to    Installing Software for Network  Printing    on page 8     You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  method        NOTE  If the    New Hardware Wizard    window appears during  the installation procedure  click   in the upper right corner of  the box to close the window  or click Cancel           5    Typical Installation    This is recommended for most users  All components necessary  for printer operations will be installed     1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  and powered on     2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive   The CD ROM should automatically run  and an installation  window appears   If the installation window does not appear  click Start and  then Run  Type X   Setup exe  replacing    X    with the  letter which represents your drive and click OK   If you use Windows Vista  click Start  gt  All programs  gt   Accessories     Run  and type X   Setup exe   If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista  click  Run Setup exe in Install or run program field  and  click Continue in the User Account Control window     3 Click Next   Se 
161. ere is power to the electrical  outlet           The unit scans very  slowly     Check if the machine is printing received  data  If so  scan the document after the  received data has been printed     Graphics are scanned more slowly than text     Communication speed slows in scan mode  because of the large amount of memory  required to analyze and reproduce the  scanned image  Set your computer to the  ECP printer mode through BIOS setting  It  will help to increase the speed  For details  about how to set BIOS  refer to your  computer user   s guide     No dial tone sounds     Check that the phone line is connected  properly    Check that the phone socket in the wall is  working by plugging in another phone        The numbers stored  in memory do not  dial correctly     Make sure that the numbers are stored in  memory correctly  Print a Phone Book list   referring to page 58           Message appears on  your computer  screen    e    Device can t be  set to the H W  mode you want       e    Port is being used  by another  program       e    Port is Disabled    e    Scanner is busy  receiving or  printing data   When the current  job is completed   try again       e    Invalid handle       e    Scanning has  failed           There may be a copying or printing job in  progress  When that job is complete  try your  job again    The Selected port is currently being used   Restart your computer and try again    The printer cable may be improperly  connected or the power may be o
162. es    e When you wan to uninstall the driver  follow the installation  instruction above  but type  root localhost Linux       uninstall sh on the terminal screen        Using Your Printer in Linux       33    Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver    1 When the Administrator Login window appears  type in  root in the Login field and enter the system password        NOTE  You must log in as a super user  root  to uninstall the  printer software  If you are not a super user  ask your system  administrator        2 Insert the printer software CD ROM  The CD ROM will  automatically run     If the CD ROM does not automatically run  click the  ii   icon at the bottom of the desktop  When the Terminal  screen appears  type in     If the CD ROM is secondary master and the location to  mount is  mnt cdrom      root localhost root  mount  t iso9660  dev hdc  mnt   cdrom     root localhost root  cd  mnt cdrom Linux   root localhost root    uninstall sh       NOTE  The installation program runs automatically if you  have an autorun software package installed and configured        3 Click Uninstall   4 Click Next     Uninstallation of Unified Linux Driver       You are about to uninstall the Unified Linux Driver     Press Next to proceed with uninstalling the driver     Press Cancel to leave the driver intact                5 Click Finish           Using Seti P program    This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC  address which is the hardware serial number of the network  
163. es  or  require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment  or otherwise materially affect its use or performance  the customer shall be given  adequate notice in writing  to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service    RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER       The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of  the machine  In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company     The Ringer Equivalence Number  REN  is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line  and is useful for determining whether  you have    overloaded    the line  Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving  telephone calls  especially ringing when your line is called  The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone  line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company  In some cases  a sum of five may not be usable on  your line  If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly  you should immediately remove it from your telephone line  as it may  cause harm to the telephone network     A FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the  user   s authority to operate this equipment  In the event that terminal equipment causes harm
164. es per sheet O O  2  4  O   N up    Fit to page printing O X O   Scale printing O X O  Different source for first X   page   Watermark X X X  Overlay X   Duplex O X O                a  This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10 3     getting started       This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the machine     This chapter includes        Setting up the hardware  e Printing a demo page    Setting up the network    SETTING UP THE HARDWARE       This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in  the Quick Install Guide  Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and  complete following steps     1  Select a stable location   Select a level  stable place with adequate space for air circulation  Allow  extra space to open covers and trays   The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or  sources of heat  cold  and humidity  Do not set the machine close to the  edge of your desk or table        100 mm 100 mm     t  gt  4 5  gt    3 9 inches   3 9 inches              482 6 MM 18 8 inches     Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1 000 m  3 281 ft   Refer to the  altitude setting to optimize your printing  See  Altitude adjustment  on  page 28 for more information     Place the machine on a flat  stable surface so that there is no incline  greater than 2 mm  0 08 inch   Otherwise  printing quality may be  affected                 e System requirements  e Installing the software  Machine s basic settings    Unpack the
165. ess OK or Start    8  Press the left right arrow until the file type you want appears and press  OK or Start   The machine begins scanning and then sends the file to the specified  server     o    Scanning to an SMB server    You can scan an image and then send it to an SMB server  You need to set   up parameters for access to SMB servers from SyncThru    Web Service    See page 46    Before scanning  you can set the scan options for your scan job  See page   47    1  Make sure that your machine is connected to a network    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF  or place a single original   on the scanner glass    For details about loading an original  see page 32    Press Scan Email    4  Press the left right arrow until Scan to SMB appears on the bottom line  of the display and press OK     5  Enter the user ID and press OK    6  Enter the password and press OK    7  Press the left right arrow until the SMB server you want appears and  press OK or Start    8  Press the left right arrow until the file format you want appears and press  OK or Start   The machine begins scanning and then sends the file to the specified  server     bad       CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH SCAN JOB    Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to  customize your scan jobs     e Scan Size  Sets the image size    e Original Type  Sets the original document s type    e Resolution  Sets the image resolution    e Scan Color  Sets the color mode    e Scan Forma
166. etup is complete  if your printer driver doesn   t i    _         X   X      _ _   B  work properly  reinstall the printer driver  See    Reinstalling Se  Printer Software    on page 11  prup om not find a connected device  Check connection between your computer and an        the printer          Please refer to the following connection method   1  Connect the device to your computer    2  Turn on the power of the device         3  If  New Hardware Wizard  is appeared  close it     4  Click  Next                    Cancel       11  Installing Printer Software in Windows       e After connecting the printer  click Next     e If you don   t want to connect the printer at this time  click  Next  and No on the following screen  Then the installation  will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  installation    e The reinstallation window that appears in this User s  Guide may differ depending on the printer and  interface in use        5 Select the components you want to reinstall and click  Next   If you installed the printer software for local printing  and you select your printer driver name  the window  asking you to print a test page appears  Do as follows     a  To print a test page  select the check box and click  Next     b  If the test page prints out correctly  click Yes   If it doesn t  click No to reprint it   6 When the reinstallation is done  click Finish        Removing Printer Software    1 Start Windows    2 From the Start menu select Program
167. etwork  cable           SUGGESTED  MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS   COMM  Error  The machine has a Ask the sender to try  communication again   problem    Incompatible  The machine has The received fax data    received a fax from  which is registered as  a junk fax     will be deleted   Reconfirm junk fax  setup  See page 56    Connection Failed    The protocol you have  entered is not  supported or server  port is wrong     Check the protocol or  server port            Line Error  Your machine cannot  connect with the  receiving fax machine  or has lost contact  because of a problem  with the phone line     Try again  If the problem  persists  wait an hour or  so for the line to clear  and try again    Or  turn the ECM mode  on  See page 56     DADF Cover  Open Error    The DADF cover is  not securely latched     Close the DADF cover  until it locks into place        Data Read Fail  Check USB Mem     Time expired while  reading data     Try again        Data Write Fail  Check USB Mem     Storing to the USB  memory failed     Check the available USB  memory space            No Answer  The receiving fax  machine has not  answered after  several redial    Try again  Make sure  that the receiving  machine is operational     Document Jam    The loaded original  has jammed in the  DADF  or ADF      Clear the jam  See page  71           Door Open Check  Transfer Belt    The front cover is not  securely latched     Close the cover until it  locks into place           Duplex Jam 0  Check 
168. exe in Install or run program field  and  click Continue in the User Account Control window     Installing Printer Software in Windows    3 Click Next           It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before  running Setup        Select a language from the list below     English v  Cancel                e If necessary  select a language from the drop down list     4 Select Custom installation  Click Next        Select Installation Type em          Select type that you want and click  Next  button     C Typical installation fora    local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s    computer    c Typical installation fora    network printer Install software for a device that is on network  Wired or Wireless     ce Custom installation    You can select installation options  This option is recommended for  professional users         lt Back Cancel          5 The list of printers available on the network appears     Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  click Next     Select Printer Port em     Select a port that will be used for your printer     Local or TCP IP Port       Shared Printer  UNC      Add TCP IP Port             Select a printer from the list below  If you don t see your printer below  click     Update  to refresh the list        IP Port Name      NOTE  If a firewall has been enabled on this PC  this may be preventing  the installer from detecting the punk  Temporarily disabl
169. f any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings  They may touch dangerous voltage points     creating a risk of fire or shock  Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine     To reduce the risk of electric shock  do not disassemble the machine  Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is    required  Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks  Incorrect reassembly could cause  electric shock when the unit is subsequently used     Safety information_5          13     Unplug the machine from the telephone jack  PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the  following conditions    e When any part of the power cord  plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed    e If liquid has been spilled into the machine    e  f the machine has been exposed to rain or water    e If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed    e Ifthe machine has been dropped  or the cabinet appears damaged    e Ifthe machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance       Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions  Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage  and    may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation       Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm  There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning  If possible  unplug the    AC
170. features           Printer  B  Presets  Standard be     Printer Features bag         C  Reverse Duplex Printing          Fit to Page     Prompt User 3   RGB Color  Standard By        PDFv     Preview     Cancel      A Mac OS 10 4     Reverse Duplex Printing  Allows you to select general  print order compare to duplex print order  If this option  does not appear  your printer does not have this  feature      Fit to Page  This setting allows you to scale your print  job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital  document size  This can be useful when you want to  check fine details on a small document      RGB Color  This setting determines how colors are  rendered  Standard is the most widely used setting  which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of  standard monitor  SRGB Monitor   Vivid mode is  appropriate for printing presentation data and charts   The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color  images than that of Standard mode  Device mode is best  used for printing fine lines  small characters and color  drawings  The color tone of Device mode may be  different from that of monitor  the pure toner colors are  used for printing Cyan  Magenta and Yellow colors     Using Your Printer with a Macintosh    Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  of Paper   You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper   This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages     1 From your Macintosh application  select Print from the  Fi
171. fessional users        Back Cancel          6  The list of machines available on the network appears  Select the printer    you want to install from the list and then click Next     Select Printer Port an     Select a port that will be used for your printer      TCP IP Port  C Shared Printer  UNC      Add TCP IP Port      Select a printer from the list below  If you don t see your printer below  click   Update  to refresh the list              IP Part Name    NOTE  If a firewall has been enabled on this PC  this may be preventing  the installer fram detecting the printer  Temporarily disable the firewall on HAYAG  this PC before continuing with the installation      lt Back Cancel      e If you do not see your machine on the list  click Update to refresh the  list  or select Add TCP IP Port to add your machine to the network   To add the machine to the network  enter the port name and the IP  address for the machine   To verify your machine s IP address or the MAC address  print a  Network Configuration page   See  Printing reports  on page 62        To find a shared network printer  UNC Path   select Shared Printer   UNC  and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer                   Getting started 27    by clicking the Browse button     If you are not sure of the IP address  contact your network  administrator or print network information   See  Printing  reports  on page 62      7  After the installation is finished  a window appears asking you to print a  
172. ff    The scanner driver is not installed or the    operating environment is not set up properly     Ensure that the machine is properly  connected and the power is on  Then restart  your computer    The USB cable may be improperly  connected or the power may be off     The original does not  feed into the  machine     Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and  you are putting it in correctly  Check that the  original is the right size  not too thick or thin  Make sure that the DADF  or ADF  is firmly  closed    The ADF rubber pad may need to be  replaced  See page 69        Faxes are not  received  automatically     The receiving mode should be set to Fax   Make sure that there is paper in the tray   Check to see if the display shows any error  message  If it does  clear the problem        The machine does  not send     Make sure that the original is loaded in the  DADF  or ADF  or on the scanner glass   Sending should show up on the display   Check the fax machine you are sending to   to see if it can receive your fax           The incoming fax has  blank spaces or is of  poor quality     The fax machine sending you the fax may  be faulty    A noisy phone line can cause line errors   Check your machine by making a copy   The toner cartridge may be empty  Replace  the toner cartridge  referring to page 66        Some of the words  on an incoming fax  are stretched     The fax machine sending you the fax had a  temporary document jam        There are lines on  the original
173. fied number of rings and  automatically receives the fax     To change the number of rings  see page 56     Receiving manually in Tel mode    You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing  Black Start or Color Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote  machine     The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to ready mode when the  reception is completed     Receiving manually using an extension telephone    This features works best when you are using an extension telephone  connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine  You can receive  a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without  going to the fax machine     When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones  press  the keys  9  on the extension phone  The machine receives the fax     Press the buttons slowly in sequence  If you still hear the fax tone from the  remote machine  try pressing    9    once again        9    is the remote receive code preset at the factory  The first and the last  asterisks are fixed  but you can change the middle number to whatever you  wish  For details about changing the code  see page 56     Receiving automatically in Ans Fax mode    To use this mode  you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket  on the back of your machine     If the caller leaves a message  the answering machine stores the message  as it would normally  If your machine detects a fax tone on the line  it  automatically starts to 
174. generates  uses  and can radiate radio frequency energy and  if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions  may cause harmful interference to  radio communications  However  there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation  If this equipment does cause  harmful interference to radio or television reception  which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on  the user is encouraged to  try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures    e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna    e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver    e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected    e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help     A Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to oper   ate the equipment     Canadian Radio Interference Regulations    This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing  equipment standard entitled    Digital Apparatus     ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada    Cet appareil num  rique respecte les limites de bruits radio  lectriques applicables aux appareils num  riques de Classe A prescrites dans la  norme sur le mat  riel brouilleur     Appareils Num  riques     ICES 003   dict  e par l Ind
175. ges being stored in  memory    12  If an original is placed on the scanner glass  select Yes to add another  page  Load another original and press OK   When you have finished  select No at the Another Page  prompt   The machine returns to ready mode  The display reminds you that you  are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set     Adding pages to a delayed fax    You can add pages to the delayed transmissions previously reserved in  your machine s memory     1  Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings    2  Press Menu    2  until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    3  Press OK when Add Page appears     4  Press the left right arrow until the fax job you want appears and  press OK   The machine scans the original into memory and shows the total  number of pages and the number of the added pages     Canceling a delayed fax   1  Press Menu  23  until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Cancel Job appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until the fax job you want appears and  press OK    4  Press OK when Yes appears   The selected fax is deleted from memory     Sending a priority fax   Using the Priority Fax feature  a high priority fax can be sent ahead of  reserved operations  The original is scanned into memory and immediately  transmitted when the current operation is finished  In addition  priority  transmission will interrupt a Multi
176. ges on One  Sheet of Paper  N Up Printing     You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet  of paper  To print more than one page per sheet  the pages will  be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify  You  can print up to 16 pages on one sheet     1    To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    From the Layout tab  choose Multiple Pages per Side in  the Layout Type drop down list    Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet   1  2  4  6  9  or 16  in the Pages per Side drop down  list    Select the page order from the Page Order drop down  list  if necessary    Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  page on the sheet    Click the Paper tab  select the paper source  size  and  type    Click OK and print the document           Or  Lk    G                         te          p    W N       Printing Posters    This feature allows you to print a single  page document onto 4   9  or 16 sheets of paper  for the purpose of pasting the sheets    together to form one poster size document     1    ua A    To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14     Click the Layout tab  select Poster Printing in the  Layout Type drop down list    Configure the poster option    You can select the page layout from Poster lt 2x2 gt    Poster lt 3x3 gt   Poster lt 4x4 g
177. h problems    ORDERING SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES 91 Supplies  91 Accessories  92 Howto purchase    INSTALLING ACCESSORIES 93 Precautions to take when installing accessories  93 Upgrading a memory module  93 Installing a memory module  94 Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties  94 Using a wireless network interface card  94 Installing a wireless network interface card  95 Configuring basic network settings  95 Selecting the authentication type  95 Setting Encryption  96 Restoring default values for wireless networking  96 Using the hard disk  96 Installing the hard disk  97 Setting the hard disk in the printer properties  97 Printing with the optional hard disk  98 File Policy  98 Deleting residual image data    Contents 17    contents       SPECIFICATIONS    GLOSSARY    INDEX    CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE    18 Contents    99 General specifications  100 Printer specifications  100 Scanner specifications  100 Copier specifications  101 Facsimile specifications    Introduction       These are the main components of your machine     This chapter includes     Printer overview  Control panel overview  Understanding the Status LED    PRINTER OVERVIEW    Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge    e Menu overview  e Supplied software  e Printer driver features       Front view                         Document width guides    USB memory port       DADF     Paper level indicator       Control panel    Optional tray 2       Output support    Multi purpose tray pa
178. han 54 dBA       CLX 6240 Series  e Ready mode  Less than 32 dBA  e Printing mode  Less than 54 dBA  e Copying mode  Less than 55 dBA          Default time to  power save  mode from  ready mode       20 Minutes          e Copier specifications  e Facsimile specifications             ITEM DESCRIPTION  Boot up time e Less than 49 seconds  e Less than 65 seconds  for CLX 6240FX only   The boot up time will be longer  if data volume is a lot in  the HDD  Operating e Temperature  15 to 32 5   C  59 to 90 5   F     environment    e Humidity  20 to 80  RH             Display 16 characters x 2 lines  Toner Black Average continuous black cartridge  cartridge life    4 yield  5 500 standard pages   CLX 6200 Series is shipped with 2 500  pages Starter toner cartridge    Color Average continuous colored cartridge   Yellow  yield  5 000 standard pages  Magenta   CLX 6200 Series shipped with 2 000  Cyan  pages Starter toner cartridge            Paper transfer  belt    Approx  50 000 pages  A4  Letter                    Memory e CLX 6200 Series  128 MB  max  384 MB    Expandable      CLX 6240 Series  256 MB  max  768 MB   External CLX 6200FX   468 x 498 x 645 mm  dimension  18 4 x 19 6 x 25 4 inches  without   WxDxH  optional tray  CLX 6200ND    468 x 498 x 651 mm  CLX 6210FX     18 4 x 19 6 x 25 6 inches  without  CLX 6240FX   optional tray  Weight e CLX 6200FX  35 kg  77 16 Ibs    Including e CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  36 kg  79 37 Ibs     consumables     CLX 6240FX  37 kg  81 57 Ibs        
179. he display and press OK     3  Press the left right arrow until the number category you want  appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until ID appears and press OK   5  Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK     6  Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press  OK     Deleting a Address Book entry   You can delete entries in Address Book one by one    1  Press Address Book until Delete appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until the number category you want  appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until the searching method you want  appears and press OK   Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all  entries in Address Book   Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the  name    4  Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press  OK   Or  enter the first letters and press OK  Press the left right arrow until  the name you want appears and press OK    5  Press OK    6  Press OK when Yes appears to confirm the deletion    7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Printing Address Book   1  You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list    1  Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the  display    2  Press OK  A list showing your speed button settings  and speed dial  and group dial entries prints out     using USB flash memory       This chapter e
180. he left right arrow to select the other mode and press OK    Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     RON    Changing the default mode    Your machine is preset to Fax mode  You can switch this default mode  between Fax mode and Copy mode   CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX   6240FX only     1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears    3  Press the left right arrow until Default Mode appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the default mode you want appears and  press OK     5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode        Setting sounds   You can control the following sounds    e Key Sound  Turns the key sound on or off  With this option set to On  a  tone sounds each time a key is pressed    e Alarm Sound  Turns the alarm sound on or off  With this option set to  On  an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication  ends    e Speaker  CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only   Turns on or  off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker  such as a  dial tone or a fax tone  With this option set to Comm  which means     Common     the speaker is on until the remote machine answers     Z You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial     e Ringer  CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only   Adjusts the  ringer volume  For the ringer volume  you can select Off  Low  Mid  and  High    Speaker  ringer  key sound  and alarm sound   1  Press Me
181. he same I O interface  port   the  situation of simultaneous access of different     consumer    application to the same port is  possible  To avoid possible conflicts  only  one of them at a time is allowed to gain  control over the device  The other     consumer    will encounter    device busy     response  This can usually happen while  starting scan procedure  and appropriate  message box appears    To identify the source of the problem  you  should open ports configuration and select the  port assigned to your scanner  port s symbol    dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation  displayed in the scanners    options   dev mfp1  relates to LP 1 and so on  USB ports start at    dev mfp4  so scanner on USB 0 relates to  dev   mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially  In  the Selected port pane you can see if the port is  occupied by some other application  If this is  the case  you should wait for completion of  the current job or should press Release port  button  if you are sure that the present port s  owner is not functioning properly        90 _ Troubleshooting       CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS       The machine does  not scan        Check if a document is loaded into the  machine    Check if your machine is connected to the  computer  Make sure if it is connected properly  if I O error is reported while scanning    Check if the port is not busy  Since functional  components of MFP  printer and scanner   share the same I O interface  port   the  situation of simu
182. hock        NEWB ew Uv    Call the service center for help           These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others  Follow them explicitly  After reading this section  keep it in a safe  place for future reference     w7    A    OKE    3   4     a    Sea ec oN    12     Read and understand all instructions   Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances   Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine     If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information  heed the safety information  You may have misunderstood the  operating instruction  If you cannot resolve the conflict  contact your sales or service representative for assistance     Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and or telephone jack before cleaning  Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners  Use only  a damp cloth for cleaning     Do not place the machine on an unstable cart  stand or table  It may fall  causing serious damage   Your machine should never be placed on  near or over a radiator  heater  air conditioner or ventilation duct   Do not allow anything to rest on the power  Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them     Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords  This can diminish performance  and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock       Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power  telephone or PC interface cords     Never push objects o
183. ich allows both wireless and cabled  cards to send files to the printer   In Ad Hoc mode  even if the network cable is connected  your  printer will use the wireless interface     e Channel  This option is available only in the Ad Hoc mode  In most  cases  you will not need to change this setting  The printer will scan  all available channels for the specified network and will adapt its  channel to the one detected     6  When you have finished  press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Selecting the authentication type   Authentication is a process of identifying the legitimacy of an user to access  a network  You can select whether or not authentication is used    1  Press Menu  23  until Network appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK    Press the left right arrow until WLAN Security appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Static WEP appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Authentication appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow to select the type you want    e Open System  Authentication is not used    e Shared Key  Authentication is used    7  Press OK to save your selection    8  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     DAAON    Setting Encryption    If your network uses WEP encryption keys  you can must select the  appropriate encryption type and configure encryption keys  You can  configure up to four keys  The active key must match the key 
184. ied Driver  Configurator  1 Double click Unified Driver Configurator on the  desktop   You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select    Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver  Configurator     2 Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the  corresponding configuration window                                                                            Printers configuration 4  e Refresh  Scanners Configuration button LG paha    Remove Printer  Ports Configuration button   lo Setas Defaut  Stop  Test   Properties   About  Help  r Selected printer   Local printer idle   Model   URI        BUCTANGS    U    34  sing Your Printer in Linux                                                                                                                         l       Printers Configuration button     Printers   Casses                                                                                                                             Unified Driver Configurator    r Printers configuration                                                                               Printers Configuration button     E Printers   asses   i       ph   Refresh  Ports Configuration button ma        baa Printer    Remove Printer  Set as Default  Stop  Test   Properties   About  Help  r Selected printer   Local printertidie   Model   URI   a Exit       You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help   3 After changing the configurations  click Exit to close the  Unified Driver Conf
185. igurator        35  Using Your Printer in Linux    Printers Configuration  Printers configuration has the two tabs  Printers and Classes     Printers Tab    You can see the current system s printer configuration by  clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified  Driver Configurator window                 Switches to Printer     anan  cams  configuration  e Peten  S 4 Ad Printer  k     Shows all of the sien  installed printer  pe  Test   Properties   Help  Shows the status  ra  model name and eet       URI of your printer        You can use the following printer control buttons    e Refresh  renews the available printers list      Add Printer  allows you to add a new printer   e Remove Printer  removes the selected printer     e Set as Default  sets the current printer as a default  printer        Stop Start  stops starts the printer    e Test  allows you to print a test page to check if the  machine is working properly    e Properties  allows you to view and change the printer  properties  For details  see page 37     Classes Tab  The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes                            Printers configuration           Printers   Classes     eee   Refresh     Se ar Add Class        PAGES Remove Class    Shows all of the   ko printer classes  stop    Properties       About    Help                   Shows the status of the  aa class and the number of  bate  printers in the class     Printers in class                         am  
186. in the Print  window  These settings include the number of copies and                   print range   2 print PK   General  Select Printer  a g F  Add Printer Eg  a   Pint to fle    Make sure that your    printer is selected       Number of copies  1      8  A 3 3             3 Select your printer driver from the Name drop down  list   To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  printer driver  click Properties or Preferences in the  application s Print window  For details  see    Printer  Settings    on page 15   If you see Setup  Printer  or Options in your Print  window  click it instead  Then click Properties on the next  screen   Click OK to close the printer properties window    4 To start the print job  click OK or Print in the Print  window        Printing to a file  PRN     You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your  purpose     To create a file   1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window     2 Print PIE     General       Select Printer    z 3    Add Printer E    Status  Ready  Location   Comment     Page Range     ail       Al  Mi  Print to file   Number of copies   1    air 3       2 Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then    click OK           Printer Settings    You can use the printer properties window  which allows you to  access all of the printer options you need when using your  printer  When the printer properties are displayed  you can  review and change the settings needed for your print job 
187. ingle original  face down on the scanner glass    For details about loading an original  see page 32    3  Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs  See  page 51    4  Press Menu  37  until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    5  Press the left right arrow until Delay Send appears and press OK    6  Enter the number of the receiving machine using the number keypad   You can use speed buttons  speed dial numbers  You can enter Group  Dial Number using Address Book Button For details  see page 57    7  Press OK to confirm the number  The display asks you to enter another  fax number to which to send the document    8  To enter more fax numbers  press OK when Yes appears and repeat  steps 6 and 7  You can add up to 10 destinations    64 Once you entered a group dial number  you cannot enter another  group dial numbers anymore     9  When you have finished entering fax numbers  press the left right arrow  to select No at the Another No   prompt and press OK    10  Enter the job name you want and press OK   For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters  see page 29   If you do not want to assign a name  skip this step    11  Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK  or Black Start     64 If you set a time earlier than the current time  the fax will be sent at  that time on the following day     The original is scanned into memory before transmission  The display  shows memory capacity and the number of pa
188. ion you want appears   e Off  Copys in Normal mode     42 Copying       e 1  gt 2Side Short  Copys pages to be read by flipping like a note pad    When Original Type is set in Photo  CLX 6200ND  CLX 6200FX   CLX 6210FX can use this function in DADF or ADF  but CLX   6240FX can use this function in both DADF or ADF  and in  Scanner glass        i                gt   gt            e 1  gt 2Side Long  Copys pages to be read like a book                    When Original Type is set in Photo  CLX 6200ND  CLX 6200FX   CLX 6210FX can use this function in DADF or ADF  but CLX   6240FX can use this function in both DADF or ADF  and in  Scanner glass     e 2  gt 1Side  e both sides of the originals and prints each of one on  a separate sheet   CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only     A   gt  A    B     e 2  gt 2Side  Copys both sides of the original and prints on both sides    of the paper  This function produces exactly the same print out from  the originals   CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only     ASA    e 2 51Side ROT2  Copys both sides of the original and prints each one  on a separate sheet  but the information on the back side of the printout  is rotated 180     CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only     AA AA   gt     y a    4  Press OK to save your selection   If the mode is enabled  the Duplex button is backlit     SETTING COPY TIMEOUT                                                                                        You can set the time the machine waits before it
189. is chapter guides you about this machine s specifications such as various features     This chapter include     e General specifications  e Printer specifications     Scanner specifications    GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS       1g The symbol   optional feature depending on machines                 ITEM DESCRIPTION  DADF  or ADF    Up to 50 sheets 75 g m   20 Ib bond   Capacity   DADF  or ADF     DADF Width  148 to 216 mm Length  148 to 356 mm  document size  e ADF Width  142 to 216 mm Length  148 to 356 mm  Paper input   Tray  250 sheets for plain paper  75 g m   20 Ib bond   capacity e Multi purpose tray  100 sheets for plain paper  75 g m      20 Ib bond     e Optional tray  500 sheets for plain paper  75 g m    20 Ib bond   For details about paper input capacity  see 34 page        Paper output  capacity    Face down  170 sheets 75 g m   20 Ib bond        Power rating    AC 110   127 V or AC 220   240 V   See the Rating label on the machine for the correct  voltage  frequency  hertz  and type of current for your  machine        Power  consumption    CLX 6200 Series  e Average operating mode  Less than  580 W   e Ready mode  Less than 82 W   e Power save mode  Less than 18 W       Power off mode  OW       CLX 6240 Series  e Average operating mode  Less than  650 W   e Ready mode  Less than 82 W   e Power save mode  Less than 28 W    e Power off mode  OW       Noise Level     CLX 6200 Series  e Ready mode  Less than 32 dBA  e Printing mode  Less than 53 dBA  e Copying mode  Less t
190. ista 2008   Linux  RedHat 8 0 9 0  Mandrake 9 2 10 1   SuSE 8 2 9 2  Fedra Core 1 4   Macintosh  Mac OS X 10 3 10 5  Universal Mac       Interface       High speed USB 2 0  Ethernet 10 100 Base TX  embedded type        a  lt will be affected by operating system used  computing performance   application software  connecting method  media type  media size and    job complexity     b  Visit www samsungprinter com to download the latest software version     100 Specifications       SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS                   ITEM DESCRIPTION  Compatibility TWAIN standard WIA standard  Scanning method   Color CCD  Resolution  TWAIN e Optical  Up to 600 x 1 200 dpi                            vy ae e Enhanced  Up to 4 800 x 4 800 dpi  standard  Scan to 100  200  300 dpi  USB  Scan to 100  200  300 dpi  E mail  Scan to 75  150  200  300  600 dpi  PC  Network Scan PDF  TIFF  JPEG     BMP  File format  Effective e Scanner glass  289 mm  11 38 inches   scanning length    DADF  or ADF   348 mm  13 7 inches   Effective Max  208 mm  8 2 inches   scanning width  Color bit depth e Internal  36 bit    e External  24 bit       Mono bit depth         1 bit for black  amp  white mode  e 8 bit for gray scale       a Due to the applications for scanning  the maximum resolution might    differ     b  JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color     COPIER SPECIFICATIONS          ITEM    DESCRIPTION       Copy Speed        Letter     CLX 6200 Series  Up to 20 cpm  A4   21 cpm    e 
191. l and click Install  Easy Install is  recommended for most users  All components necessary  for printer operations will be installed     If you select Custom Install  you can choose individual  components to install        ONOQURA WU N hk    41    9 The message which warns all application will close on your  computer appears  Click Continue    10 Select Typical installation for a local printer and then  click OK        NOTE  If you select Typical installation for a network  printer  see    Using SetIP program    on page 42 after the  installation is finished        11 After the installation is finished  click Quit        NOTE   e If you have installed scan driver  click Restart     e After the installation is finished  see    Setting Up the Printer     on page 42             Uninstalling software    Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software  or if  installation fails     1 Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer   Turn on your computer and printer    Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the  CD ROM drive    Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your  Macintosh desktop    Double click the MAC Installer folder    Double click the Installer icon    Enter the password and click OK    The Samsung Installer window opens  Click Continue  Select Uninstall and click Uninstall    The message which warns all application will close on your  computer appears  Click Continue    10 When the uninstallation is done  click Quit     O ONA AA W N  
192. l features  and contains information for maintaining your    machine  troubleshooting  and installing accessories   O This user s guide also contains a Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in  various operating systems  and how to use the included software utilities     Printer Driver Help Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing  To access a     printer driver help screen  click Help from the printer properties dialog box           Samsung website If you have Internet access  you can get help  support  printer drivers  manuals  and order information from the Samsung website     www samsungprinter com           4 Features of your new laser product    safety Information       IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS       What the icons and signs in this user s guide mean        WARNING    AN Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death        CAUTION    Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage        CAUTION    To reduce the risk of fire  explosion  electric shock  or personal injury when using your laser MFP  follow these basic safety  precautions           Do NOT attempt        Do NOT disassemble        Do NOT touch        Follow directions explicitly        Unplug the power plug from the wall socket        Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric s
193. laced  See page 69        The paper keeps There is too much paper in the tray  Remove   jamming  excess paper from the tray  If you are printing  on special materials  use the multi purpose tray    e An incorrect type of paper is being used  Use  only paper that meets the specifications  required by the machine  See page 33    e There may be debris inside the machine  Open  the front cover and remove the debris    e If an original does not feed into the machine   the DADF  or ADF  rubber pad may require to  be replaced  See page 69        Envelopes skew or Ensure the paper guides are against both sides of  fail to feed correctly    the envelopes           82 _ Troubleshooting       Printing problems          POSSIBLE          POSSIBLE  CONDITION CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  The machine The machine is not Check the power cord    does not print     receiving power     connections  Check the  power switch and the power  source     CONDITION CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  A print job is Thejob may be very   Reduce the complexity of the  extremely slow    complex  page or try adjusting the print    quality settings           The machine is not  selected as the  default printer        Select Samsung CLX 6200  Series or CLX 6240 Series  as your default printer in your  Windows        e Check the machine for the following   e The front cover is not closed  Close the cover   e Paper is jammed  Clear the paper jam  See page      No paper is loaded  Load paper  See page 36      The toner cart
194. le  100        Cancel      A Mac OS 10 3    4 Open the File menu and click Print     5 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which    pages you want to print   6 Click Print when you finish setting the options        44    Changing Printer Settings    You can use advanced printing features when using your  printer     From your Macintosh application  select Print from the File  menu  The printer name which appears in the printer properties  window may differ depending on the printer in use  Except for  the name  the composition of the printer properties window is  similar        NOTE  The setting options may differ depending on printers  and Macintosh OS version        Layout    The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  appears on the printed page  You can print multiple pages on  one sheet of paper  Select Layout from the Presets drop   down list to access the following features        Printer      5         gt     Presets  _ Standard               Layout   5   Pages per Sheet  1        1 Border  None bj    Two Sided    Off  O Long edged binding  O Short edged binding                             PDFv     Preview   Cancel    A Mac OS 10 4     Pages per Sheet  This feature determines how many  pages printed on one page  For details  see  Printing  Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper  on the next  column      Layout Direction  You can select the printing direction  on a page as like the examples on Ul     Using Your Printer with a Macintosh    Gra
195. le menu   2 Select Layout        Printer              Presets  Standard P3       Layout            Border  None hy                                       4 Preview     Save As PDF      C Fax            A Mac OS 10 3    3 Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet  of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop down list    4 Select the page order from the Layout Direction option   To print a border around each page on the sheet  select  the option you want from the Border drop down list    5 Click Print  and the printer prints the selected number of  pages on one side of each page        46    Duplex Printing    You can print on both sides of the paper  Before printing in the  duplex mode  decide on which edge you will be binding your  finished document  The binding options are    Long Edge Binding  Which is the conventional layout  used in book binding    Short Edge Binding  Which is the type often used with  calendars     1 From your Macintosh application  select Print from the  File menu   2 Select the Layout                    Printer     Hj  Presets  Standard Bj  taoutt    OB                           ing    Off  O Long Edge Binding  O Short Edge Binding               Preview     Save As PDF      C Fax        Cancel       Print 3             A Mac OS 10 3    3 Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing  option    4 Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the  paper        CAUTION  If you have selected duplex printing and  then try to print multi
196. left right arrow until Form Menu appears and press OK     3  Press the left right arrow until the form you want appears and press OK     e Off  Prints in normal mode    e Single Form  Prints all page using the first form    e Double Form  Prints the front page using the first form and the   back page using the second form    Press Back  429  to return to the upper menu level    Press the left right arrow until Select Form appears and press OK    Press OK when 1st Form appears    Press the left right arrow until the form file you want appears and   press OK    If you select Double Form  continue the next step    Press the left right arrow until 2nd Form appears and press OK    9  Press the left right arrow until the form file for the second form  appears and press OK     phe ou eS    5    98 Installing accessories       File Policy    You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed  with the job through HDD  If the HDD memory already has the same name  when you entered a new file name  you can rename or overwrite it     1  Press Menu  2  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until File Policy appears and press OK    4  Press the left right arrow until the job setting you want appears and  press OK    e Rename  If the HDD memory already has the same name when you  enter a new file name  the file will be saved as 
197. ll be used for your printer  a   m Select components     Local or TCP IP Port   Select components that you would like to install     Shared Printer  UNC   C Add TCP IP Port  Select a printer from the list below  If you don t see your printer below  click     Update  to refresh the list      IP Port Name    m Chanae Destination Folder  T     aaa  NOTE  If a firewall has been enabled on this PC  this may be preventing  the installer from detecting the printer  Temporarily disable the firewall on    this Pe before LOINNE AT Na installation  oie   Update   i  Set IP Address  lt Back Next gt  Cancel  lt Back Cancel  mean paaa ee  pasan   Lee asa                       NOTE  If your printer is not already connected to the   NOTE  You can change the desired installation folder by  computer  the following window will appear  clicking  Browse                 Connect Device       ss A i  Setup can not find a connected device  Check connection between your computer and an    l 7 After the installation IS finished  a window asking you to  kepie l print a test page appears  If you choose to print a test       page  select the checkbox and click Next   Otherwise  just click Next and skip to step 9     Please refer to the following connection method    8 If the test page prints out correctly  click Yes     1  Connect the device to your computer    If not  click No to reprint it     2  Tum on the power of the device       3  If  New Hardware Wizard  is appeared  close it    9    avon To regis
198. lored black   You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter    L    or colored red   You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug  adaptor  or at the distribution board     DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  EUROPEAN COUNTRIES        Approvals and Certifications    The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd  Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93   68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated   January 1  1995  Council Directive 73 23 EEC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment   January 1  1996  Council Directive 89 336 EEC  92 31 EEC   approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic  compatibility   March 9  1999  Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of  their conformity  A full declaration  defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics  Co   Ltd  representative     EC Certification    Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment  amp  Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive  FAX     This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched  telephone network  PSTN  in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC  The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and  compatible PBXs of the European co
199. ltaneous access of different     consumer    application to the same port is  possible  To avoid possible conflicts  only one  of them at a time is allowed to gain control over  the device  The other    consumer    will  encounter    device busy    response  This can  usually happen while starting scan procedure   and appropriate message box will be displayed   To identify the source of the problem  you  should open ports configuration and select the  port assigned to your scanner  port s symbol    dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation  displayed in the scanners    options   dev mfp1  relates to LP 1 and so on  USB ports start at    dev mfp4  so scanner on USB 0 relates to  dev   mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially  In  the Selected port pane you can see if the port is  occupied by some other application  If this is  the case  you should wait for completion of the  current job or should press Release port  button  if you are sure that the present port   s  owner is not functioning properly        Z Refer to Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further  information on Linux error messages     Common Macintosh problems       CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS       The printer does not  print PDF file correctly   Some parts of graphics   text  or illustrations are  missing     Incompatibility between the PDF file and  the Acrobat products    Printing the PDF file as an image may  solve this problem  Turn on Print As  Image from the Acrobat printing optio
200. ltype job  See page 39   You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a  ID Copy driver s license to a single side of paper  See    page 40        Reduce Enlarge    Makes a copy smaller or larger than the original        AE 6 600000 0 O  O PE    Duplex    Allows you to print documents on both sides of  the paper  See page 40        USB Print    Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB  Memory device when it is inserted into the USB  memory port on the front of your machine  See  page 59        Address Book    Allows you to search for stored email  addresses        OO O    Number keypad    Dials a number or enters alphanumeric  characters        WED Bd    10 14   E  i  Do o          B  p BDO 3       Stop Clear    Stops an operation at any time  In ready mode   clears cancels the copy options  such as the  resolution  the document type setting  the copy  size  and the number of copies        Color Start    Starts a job in Color mode        Black Start    Starts a job in Black and White mode        L e All illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine  depending on its options or models   e The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large  number of pages at once  Make sure that you do not touch the  surface  and do not allow children near it     Introduction_ 21    UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED       The color of the Status LED indicates the machine s current status        STATUS DESCRIPTION       Off e The machine is powered off line
201. machine is completed   See   Setting up the network  on page 25   All applications should be closed  on your computer before beginning installation    3  Insert the Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive    The CD ROM should automatically run  and an installation window  appears    If the installation window does not appear  click Start  gt  Run  Type  X  Setup exe  replacing    X    with the letter which represents your drive  and click OK    If you use Windows Vista  click Start  gt  All Programs  gt  Accessories  gt   Run  and type X  Setup exe    If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista  click Run Setup exe  in Install or run program field  and click Continue in the User Account  Control window        4  Click Next        a       It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before  running Setup     Select a language from the list below     English X  Cancel                   e If necessary  select a language from the drop down list     5  Select Typical installation for a network printer  and then click Next        EJ  Select Installation Type em       Select type that you want and click  Next  button        c Typical installation for a    local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s    computer    o  lope maala ei Install software for a device that is on network  Wired or Wireless   a H          Custom installation    You can select installation options  This option is recommended for  pro
202. mber  from 1 to 65535  The default  port number is 25     AYN    Setting up an FTP server    To use an FTP server  you need to set up parameters to access the FTP  servers using SyncThru    Web Service     1  Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  Go to access the web site of your machine     Click Machine Settings and FTP Setup   Click Server List    Click Add    Select the index number  from 1 to 20     Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server  List entry  This name will be displayed on your machine     Select IP Address or Host Name    Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name   9  Enter the server port number  from 1 to 65535    The default port number is 21     DAAN    SON    46 Scanning       10  Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to  permit access to unauthorized persons  It is unchecked by default    11  Enter the login name and password    12  Enter the Scan File Folder under FTP directory for saving the  scanned image    13  Click Apply     Setting up an SMB server   To use an SMB server  you need to set up parameters for access to  SMB servers using SyncThru    Web Service    1  Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  Go to access the web site of your machine    Click Machine Settings and SMB Setup    Click Server List    Click Add    Select the index number  from 1 to 20    Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server 
203. ments     Z To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved  add or  delete the application program in Samsung Scan Manager gt Set  Scan Button     10  To scan from the default setting  press Color Start or Black Start  Press  the left right button until the setting you want appears then press OK     11  Scanning begins     4 e Scanned image is saved in computer s My Documents gt  My  Pictures  Samsung folder   e You can use Tawin driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan  Manager program   e You can also scan by pressing Window s Start5 Control  Panel gt  Samsung Scan Manager gt Quick Scan     SCANNING BY A NETWORK CONNECTION       If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network  parameters correctly  you can scan and send images over the network     Preparing for network scanning    Before using your machine   s network scanning features  you need to  configure the following settings  depending on your scan destination    e Register as an authorized user for scanning to email  FTP  or SMB     Setup the SMTP server for scanning to email   e Setup the FTP servers for scanning to FTP      Setup the SMB servers for scanning to SMB    User authentication for network scanning   To send an email  FTP  SMB or Network  you must register authorized   local or network users using SyncThru    Web Service    e If user authentication has been activated  only authorized local users  or on the DB server  SMB  LDAP  Kerberos  can send scanned data  to the net
204. n feature  and retry  printing     e You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password   Deactivate the password feature  and retry printing     Depending on how a PDF file was created  it may not be able  to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program     Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer   PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct  Printing Utility program     The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version  1 4 and below  For a higher version  you must open the file  to print it           Overview Direct Printing Utility    Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly  to your printer without having to open the file  It sends data  through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer  driver  It only supports PDF format    To installing this program  you should select Custom  installation and put a check mark in this program when you  install the printer driver     Using Direct Printing Utility    25          Printing    There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing Utility     From the Direct Printing Utility window    1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs    Direct Printing Utility     Direct Printing Utility   Or  double click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on  your desk top     The Direct Printing Utility window opens     2 Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section  and click Browse    3 Select the PDF file you will p
205. n need to be halted for any reason           Close the front cover   4  Pull the tray open        5  Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out as shown  below        Troubleshooting_ 73    6  To replace the tray  lower the rear edge  align it with the slot  and slide it  into the machine        7  Open the front cover and close it  The machine will resume printing     In the multi purpose tray   When you print using the Multi purpose Tray and the machine detects that   there is either no paper or that the paper has been improperly loaded  follow   the next steps to release the jammed paper    1  Check if the paper is stuck in the feeding area  and if so  pull it out gently  and slowly        If you cannot find the jammed paper  or if there is any resistance  removing the paper  stop pulling and go to step 2     2  Close the multi purpose tray   Pull the tray out   4  Open the inner cover while you are pushing the lever with two hands     bad       74 Troubleshooting         Pull the paper out gently          Replace the tray     If you cannot find the jammed paper  or if there is any resistance  removing the paper  stop pulling and go to step 8       Using the handle  completely open the front cover          Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown  To avoid    tearing the paper  pull it out gently and slowly        A e Do not touch the green surface  the OPC drum or the front of  each toner cartridge  with your hands or any other material  Us
206. n page 14 for more  information on accessing printer properties     2 Printing Preferences                                        Layout   Paper Graphic   Extras   About  Paper Orientation  it  s  J  cape S  a  Rotate 180 Degrees   Layout Options   Layout Type   Multiple Pages per Side v   Pages per Side 1 v  Letter  8 50 x 11 00 in   Double sided Printing Omm   inch   my O Printer Setting oneal   y jas O None Quality  Normal    gt   NO OLong Edge Favorites  O Shott Edge Printer Default  v  IT     OK Cancel Help          Paper Orientation   Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which   information is printed on a page      Portrait prints across the width of the page  letter style      Landscape prints across the length of the page  spreadsheet  style      Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees                           gt      w  pol  CI  wn  O  w  Oo   O     A Portrait    Layout Options   Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options    You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing    e For details  see    Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper   N Up Printing     on page 19      For details  see    Printing Posters    on page 20     For details  see    Printing Booklets    on page 20    Double sided Printing   Double sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of  paper  If this option does not appear  your printer does  not have this feature    e For details  see    Printing on Both Sides of Pap
207. nal has been sent successfully  the machine  beeps and returns to ready mode    When something goes wrong while sending your fax  an error message  appears on the display  For a list of error messages and their meanings  see  page 78  If you receive an error message  press Stop Clear to clear the  message and try to send the fax again    You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each  time sending a fax is completed  For further details  see page 56     Automatic redialing   When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you  send a fax  the machine automatically redials the number every three  minutes  up to seven times according to the factory default settings    When the display shows Retry Redial   press OK to redial the number  without waiting  To cancel the automatic redialing  press Stop Clear    To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial  attempts  See page 56     52 Faxing       Redialing the last number  To redial the number you called last   1  Press Redial Pause     2  When an original is loaded in the DADF  or ADF   the machine  automatically begins to send   If an original is placed on the scanner glass  select Yes to add another  page  Load another original and press OK  When you have finished   select No at the Another Page  prompt     Sending faxes on both sides of paper   You can set the machine to send faxes on both sides of paper   CLX   6210FX  CLX 6240FX only    1  Press Fax    2  
208. nd  cameras    e If there is not Scan a document or picture  open the MS paint  program and click From Scanner or Camera    on File menu        4 Click New Scan and then scan driver is opened     5 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  see your preferences affect the picture     6 Click Scan        NOTE  If you want to cancel the scan job  press the Cancel  button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard           8 Using Smart Panel    Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the  status of the printer  and allows you to customize the printer s  settings  Smart Panel is installed automatically when you  install the printer software        NOTE   e To use this program  you need      Windows  To check for windows operating system s  that  are compatible with your printer  refer to Printer  Specifications in your Printer User   s Guide      Mac OS X 10 3 or higher     Linux  To check for Linux systems that are compatible with    your printer  refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer  User s Guide       Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher for flash animation  in HTML Help     If you need to know the exact name of your printer  you can  check the supplied CD ROM           Understanding Smart Panel    If an error occurs while printing  Smart Panel appears  automatically  showing the error     You can also launch Smart Panel manually  Double click the  Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar  in Windows   or  Notification Area  in Linux   You c
209. nd Scan  Area sections   el mage Quality  allows you to select the color  composition and the scan resolution for the image      Scan Area  allows you to select the page size  The  Advanced button enables you to set the page size  manually     If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings   select from the J ob Type drop down list  For details about  the preset Job Type settings  see page 39     You can restore the default setting for the scan options  by clicking Default   8 When you have finished  click Scan to start scanning     The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window  to show you the progress of the scan  To cancel scanning   click Cancel   9 The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager  tab           4       If you want to edit the scanned image  use the toolbar   For further details about editing an image  see page 39     Using Your Printer in Linux       39    10 When you are finished  click Save on the toolbar    11 Select the file directory where you want to save the image  and enter the file name    12 Click Save     Adding J ob Type Settings   You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later   scanning    To save a new Job Type setting    Change the options from the Scanner Properties window    Click Save As    Enter the name for your setting    Click OK    Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop down  list    To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job    1 Select the setting you want to use from the Jo
210. nd easily send the  scanned document to connected computer s My Documents folder  In  order to use this function  your machine and computer must be connect by  USB cable or by network    Also  with the offered Samsung Scan Manager program  scanned  documents can be opened with the program you have setup previously   Such as Microsoft Paint  Email  SmarThru Office  OCR can be added to  application program  See  Setting scan information in Samsung Scan  Manager   on page 44     Scanned images can be saved as BMP  JEPG  TIFF  PDF files     Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager   You can find out about Samsung Scan Manager program information and  installed scan driver s condition  Also  you can change scan settings and  add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are save in  Samsung Scan Manager program     64 Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the Window  and Macintosh system  If you use the Macintosh  See Software  section     1  Press Start5  Control Panel gt  Samsung Scan Manager   Samsung Scan Manager Administration appears     L  You can open Samsung Scan Manager by pressing the Smart  Panel icon s right in the window task bar   2  Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager   Press Scan Property     4  Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving destination and scan  settings  add or delete application program and format files   You can change the scanning machine by using Change Port   Local or  Network    
211. ne stops printing   or Continue  If you select Continue    lt  Stop  gt  the machine keeps  printing  but the quality  cannot be guaranteed   If you do not select any   the machine will work as  Stop is selected   Replace the  corresponding toner  cartridge with a  Samsung genuine  cartridge  See page 66   One Page is Single page data Reduce the resolution  Too Large exceeds the and try again   configured mail size   Operation You are in the Add Check the display to see  Not Assigned Page Cancel Job if there are any  operation  but there scheduled jobs   are no jobs stored   Out Bin Full The output tray of the   Remove paper   machine is full of  paper   Paper Jam 0 Paper has jammed in   Clear the jam  See page    Open Close Door    the feeding area of the  tray     73     Self Diagnostics  Temperature    The engine in your  machine is checking  problems detected     Wait a few minutes           Paper Jam 1  Open Close Door    Paper has jammed  inside the machine     Clear the jam  See page  75     Self Diagnostics  LSU    The LSU  Laser  Scanning Unit  in your  machine is checking  problems detected     Wait a few minutes           Paper Jam 2  Check Inside    Special print media  has jammed in the  paper exit area     Clear the jam  See page  76           Power Failure    Power has turned off  then on and the  machine s memory    has not been back up     The job which you were  trying to do before the  power failure must be  completely re done              Remove Paper  in 
212. ng Address Book for an entry    There are two ways to search for an address in memory  You can either  scan from A to Z sequentially or search by entering the first letters of the  name associated with the address     Searching sequentially through memory  1  If necessary  press Scan Email     2  Press Address Book until Search  amp  Send appears on the bottom  line of the display and press OK     3  Press the left right arrow until the number category you want  appears and press OK     4  Press OK when All appears     5  Press the left right arrow until the name and address you want  appears  You can search upwards or downwards through the entire  memory in alphabetical order     Searching with a particular first letter  1  If necessary  press Scan Email     2  Press Address Book until Search  amp  Send appears on the bottom  line of the display and press OK     3  Press the left right arrow until the number category you want  appears and press OK     Press the left right arrow until ID appears and press OK   Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK     6  Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press  OK     nA    Printing Address Book   You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list    1  Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the  display    2  Press OK   A list showing your speed button settings  and the speed group email  entries print out     SCAN ON BOTH SIDES OF PAPER       By using the Du
213. ng a fax  automatically 52    setting  font 31    sounds  set 29   speaker sound 29   speaker volume 29   special copy features 40  speed buttons  set 57  speed dial numbers  set 57    supplies  checking life 69  expected toner cartridge life 65    T  Tel mode  receiving mode 53  toner cartridge   replacing 67    tray  adjusting the width and length 36    U    USB flash memory  data backup 60  managing 61  printing 60  scanning 59    using  SetIP 26    V    volume  adjust  ringer 29  speaker 29    W  Windows problems 87  wireless network interface card  install 94    Index 107    contact SAMSUNG wordwide       If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products  contact the Samsung customer care center                                                                                                                                                  COUNTRY  CUSTOMER CARE  REGION CENTER DEE PULE   ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar   AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au   AUSTRIA 0810 SAMSUNG  7267864    www samsung com at       0 07 min    BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www samsung com be   Dutch   www samsung com   be fr  French    BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www samsung com br   4004 0000  CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG  726  www samsung com ca  7864   CHILE 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864    www samsung com cl  CHINA 800 810 5858 www samsung com cn  400 810 5858  010 6475 1880   COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com co   COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com   latin   CZECH 800 SAMSUN
214. ng to  the global server this  message displays     Check the authentication  account and password           Global Server  Not Configured    When no global server  is configured  this  message displays     Check the LDAP server  configuration settings     Address you have entered is address   invalid    IP Conflict The network IP Check the IP address  address you have set   and reset it if necessary   is being used by See page 25   someone else    Line Busy The receiving fax Try again after a few  machine did not minutes   answer or the line is  already engaged    Low Power The machine is in the   When data is received  it    previous stage of the  power save mode     switches to on line  automatically           Global Server  Not Found    When the device is  unable to find the  Global server     Check the LDAP server  address  The LDAP  server address is  incorrect  or the server  has failed     Mail Exceeds    The mail size is larger    Divide your mail or       Server Support than the supported reduce the resolution   size by SMTP server    Main Motor There is a problemin   Open and then close the   Locked the main motor  front cover           Global Server  Query Timeout    Network Information  Center  NIC  failed to  get the proper  response from the  LDAP server within  specified time     Check the LDAP server  setting  LDAP server  setting is incorrect     Load Manually  Press Start Key    The multi purpose  tray is empty in  manual feed mode     Load paper in the mul
215. nly    Allows you to  connect your  machine to a  wireless network and  share it with other  people over the  network     ML NWA10L       Hard Disk       Allows you to  enhance the  machine   s capability  and print in various  ways        CLX HDK410       a Depending on your country  wireless LAN cards may not be available   Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought    your printer     Your machine may have two memory slots with a factory pre installed  memory module in one slot  When you are expanding the memory  capacity  you can add a memory module to the vacant memory slot   according to the table above  It is strongly recommended that you  expand a memory module in vacant memory slot only  without  removing a pre installed memory module  If your machine has 128 MB  memory capacity and you want to add 512 MB  the memory capacity  expands up to 640 MB     Ordering supplies and accessories_ 91    HOW TO PURCHASE  To order Samsung authorized supplies or accessories  contact your local  Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine  or visit    www samsung com supplies and select your country region to obtain    information on calling for technical support        92 Ordering supplies and accessories       Installing accessories       Your machine is a full featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs  Recognizing that each user  may have different requirements  however  Samsung makes several accessories
216. nment  printing interval  media type  and media size    1  Turn the machine off  then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool    2  Using the handle  completely open the front cover        3  Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt   Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt  lift it out of the machine        4  Take a new paper transfer belt out of its package        A   Don t use sharp objects  such as a knife or scissors  to open  the paper transfer belt package  You could damage the  surface of the paper transfer belt     e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt     5  Holding the handle on the new paper transfer belt  align it with the slots  on the inside of the front cover        6  Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front cover and  firmly seated        7  Close the front cover firmly   8  Turn the machine on        MAINTENANCE PARTS    To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts   and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following  condition  the following items will need to be replaced after the specified  number of pages  or when the life span of each item has expired           ITEMS YIELD  AVERAGE        Fuser unit Approx  100 000 pages       DADPF  or ADF  friction pad Approx  20 000 pages       DADPF  or ADF  pick up roller Approx  80 000 pages       Pick up roller  Multi purpose tray  Approx  70 000 pages  FCF   Optional tray 2      
217. nology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use   When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time  power consumption is automatically lowered   ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S  marks    ENERGY STAR For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http   www energystar gov          RECYCLING       Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner     gp    CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT  WASTE ELECTRICAL  amp  ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT         Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems     This marking on the product  accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories  e g  charger  headset  USB  cable  should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life  To prevent possible harm to the environment or  human health from uncontrolled waste disposal  please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to  promote the sustainable reuse of material resources  Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product  or  their local government office  for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling  Business users should  contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract  This product and its electronic accessories sh
218. ns     mm It will take longer to print when  L you print a PDF file as an image        The document has  printed  but the print job  has not disappeared  from the spooler in Mac  OS 10 3 2     Update your Mac OS to OS 10 3 3  or  higher        Some letters are not  displayed normally  during the Cover page  printing        This problem is caused because Mac OS  cannot create the font during the Cover  page printing  English alphabet and  numbers are displayed normally at the  Cover page           e Refer to Mac OS User s Guide that came with your computer for  further information on Mac OS error messages     ordering supplies and accessones       This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine     This chapter includes   e Supplies  e Accessories    Z The optional parts or features may differ by countries  Contact your  sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your  country     SUPPLIES    When the toner runs out  you can order the following type of toner cartridge  for your machine           TYPE AVERAGE YIELD4 PART NUMBER       High yield  toner cartridge    Average continuous black  cartridge yield  5 500  standard pages  Black    e Average continuous  colored cartridge yield   5 000 standard pages   Yellow Magenta Cyan     CLP K660B  Black   CLP C660B Cyan   CLP M660B  Magenta   CLP Y660B  Yellow        Standard yield      toner cartridge    Average continuous black  cartridge yield  2 500  stand
219. ntity which does not affect printer  performance for a month  Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation  such as pages per year  The lifespan means the average capacity of  print outs  usually within the warranty period  For example  if the duty  cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days  a printer  limits 2 400 pages a day     ECM    Error Correction Mode  ECM  is an optional transmission mode built into  Class 1 fax machines or fax modems  It automatically detects and  corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes  caused by telephone line noise     Emulation    Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as  another     An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different  system  so that the second system behaves like the first system   Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior  which is  in contrast to simulation  which concerns an abstract model of the  system being simulated  often considering its internal state     Ethernet    Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local  area networks  LANs   It defines wiring and signaling for the physical  layer  and frame formats and protocols for the media access control   MAC  data link layer of the OSI model  Ethernet is mostly standardized  as IEEE 802 3  It has become the most widespread LAN technology in  use during the 1990s to the present     EtherTalk    A suite of protocols developed by Apple Compute
220. nu  73  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Sound Volume appears and press  OK    3  Press the left right arrow until the sound option you want appears  and press OK    4  Press the left right arrow until the desired status or volume for the  sound you have selected appears and press OK    5  If necessary  repeat steps 3 through 5 to set other sounds    6  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Speaker volume   1  Press On Hook Dial  A dial tone sounds from the speaker    2  Press the left right arrow until you hear the volume you want    3  Press Stop Clear to save the change and return to ready mode     4 You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is  connected     Entering characters using the number keypad    As you perform various tasks  you may need to enter names and numbers   For example  when you set up your machine  you enter your name or your  company   s name  and the fax number  When you store fax numbers or   email addresses in memory  you may also enter the corresponding names     Entering alphanumeric characters    1  When you are prompted to enter a letter  locate the button labeled  with the character you want  Press the button until the correct letter  appears on the display    For example  to enter the letter O  press 6  labeled with MNO    Each time you press 6  the display shows a different letter  M  N  O   m  n  o and finally 6    You can enter speci
221. o this guide for installing and using the machine     Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably  as below     e Document is synonymous with original   e Paper is synonymous with media  or print media   Following table offers the conventions of this guide                       CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE   Bold Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine  Start   Note Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine 7  The date format may differ from  function and feature  1G country to country   Caution Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical Do not touch the green underside of  damage or malfunction  A the toner cartridge    Footnote Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase  a  pages per minute    See page 1 for more Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information     See page 1 for more information    information              Features of your new laser product_3    FINDING MORE INFORMATION       You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources  either as a print out or onscreen        Quick Install Guide Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine                                            Online User s Guide   Provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s ful
222. o upload a document file to server  while working within the SmarThru Office       Send by Fax  To send documents by Local or Network  fax machine while working within the SmarThru  Office     Scanning       28    4 Click Scan on the tool bar of SmarThru Office window   Adjust the scan settings        OCR Lurga                      Click to start scanning        NOTE     e In Windows XP operating system  you can use SmarThru  Office launcher  which is on the right end of taskbar  to  open the Scan Setting window easily                    e In other operating systems beside Windows XP  click the    SmarThru icon Ki in the tray area of the windows taskbar  to activate the SmarThru Office launcher     SmarThru Office  x                       fie       Scan Setting lets you use the following services      Select Scanner  Select the Local or Network scanner       Local Scan  After scanning with parallel port or USB  port  you can store the scanned output in image or  document file       Network Scan  After scanning via network  you can  store the scanned output in J PEG  TIFF  or pdf file   To use network scanner  your computer should install  the Scan Manager and register the scanner within  that program  Refer to Scanning chapter in user s  guide     Scan Settings  Allows you to customize settings for  Image type  Resolution  Scan Size  Paper Source        Scan To  Allows you to customize settings for File Name   File Format  OCR Language     5 To start scanning  click Scan     
223. ode                        11  Menu  72  available menus     12  Sudan oe a nagalala values    13  OK Confirms the selection on the screen    Back  429  Sends you back to the upper menu level     15  Status Shows the status of your machine  See page 22   Barnes Adjusts the document brightness for the current    copy job  See  Darkness  on page 39       20 Introduction    Solo    All illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine  depending on its options or models    The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large  number of pages at once  Make sure that you do not touch the  surface  and do not allow children near it     CLX 6200ND only                               Copy Activates Copy mode   Scan Email Activates Scan mode   Display Shows the current status and prompts during an    operation        Toner colors    The toner colors shown below the LCD display  co works with the display messages  See  Status LED with the toner cartridge messages  on page 22        Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the                         Menu   2  available menus   Scroll through the options available in the  Left right arrow selected menu  and increase or decrease  values   OK Confirms the selection on the screen   Back     Sends you back to the upper menu level   Status Shows the status of your machine  See page  Adjusts the document brightness for the current  FORMS copy job  See page 39   TR Selects the document type for the current copy  Original
224. odule to the vacant memory slot  It is strongly  recommended that you expand a memory module in vacant memory slot  only without removing a pre installed memory module  If your machine has  128 MB memory capacity and you want to add 512 MB  the memory  capacity expands up to 640 MB  Order information is provided for optional  memory module   See page 91     Installing a memory module  1  Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine        e Using a wireless network interface card  e Using the hard disk    2  Release the screws and remove the rear cover        3  Release the screws  then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to  the right           1 Control board  cover       Z If you want to remove an existing memory module  push the two  latches at the ends of the module outward     4  Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag     Installing accessories_ 93    5  Holding the memory module by the edges  align the memory module on  the slot at about a 30 degree tilt  Make sure that the notches of the  module and the grooves on the slot fit each other        Z The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those  on an actual memory module and its slot     6  Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a  click         ce                                                                   CA           E  fl    A Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be  damaged  If the module does not seem to fit into
225. ogram will allow you to set  network parameters automatically  Follow the instructions in the  installation window  This program does not support Linux        Getting started_ 25    Configuring network protocol via the machine  You can set up TCP IP network parameters  follow the steps listed below   1  Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ 45  Ethernet cable   2  Make sure you have turned on the machine   3  Press Menu  f3  on the control panel  until you see Network on the  bottom line of the display   Press OK to access the menu   Press the left right arrow until TCP IP displays   Press OK   Press the left right arrow until Static displays   Press OK   Press the left right arrow until IP Address displays   0  Press OK   Enter a byte between O and 255 using the number keypad and press the    left right arrow to move between bytes   Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th byte   11  When you have finished  press OK     Repeat steps 9 and 10 to configure the other TCP IP parameters   subnet mask and gateway address     sODNONA    Z Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure     You can also set up the network settings through the network  administration programs       SyncThru   Web Admin Service  Web based printer  management solution for network administrators  SyncThru    Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of  managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and  troublesho
226. on you are using  select Print from the  File menu    2 Select Print directly using Ipr    3 Inthe LPR GUI window  select the model name of your  machine from the Printer list and click Properties     Printer          Properties          Status  idle  accepting jobs  Location   Description            Set as Default           Page Selection          All pages  O Even pages    O Odd pages       Some pages          commas  1 2 5 10 12 17      Enter page numbers and or groups of pages to print separated by              Copies    Copies  1 100    1 S      lf Reverse Ali Pages  3 2 1     GPG                                     Help    oak    Cancel    4 Change the printer and print job properties      amp     Properties    General   Text Graphics   Device            Paper Options                      Paper Size    Aa xr  Paper Type    Printer Default        Paper Orientation            c         Portrait   gt   Landscape   i Reverse    p Banners   Pages per Side  N Up   Start    None  7     Normal  1 Up   End    None    O  2 Up    D 4 Up                         F Hep      Ca  Cra           J Click        The following four tabs display at the top of the window       General   allows you to change the paper size  the paper  type  and the orientation of the documents  enables the  duplex feature  adds start and end banners  and changes  the number of pages per sheet     Text   allows you to specify the page margins and set the  text options  such as spacing or columns       Graphics 
227. ons   Click OK and print the document     uk WU N          Using Watermarks    The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  document  For example  you may want to have large gray  letters reading    DRAFT    or    CONFIDENTIAL    printed diagonally  across the first page or all pages of a document    There are several predefined watermarks that come with the  printer  and they can be modified  or you can add new ones to  the list     Using an Existing Watermark    1 To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    2 Click the Extras tab  and select the desired watermark  from the Watermark drop down list  You will see the  selected watermark in the preview image    3 Click OK and start printing        NOTE  The preview image shows how the page will look when  it is printed        Creating a Watermark    1 To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    2 Click the Extras tab  and click the Edit button in the  Watermark section  The Edit Watermark window  appears    3 Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box   You can enter up to 40 characters  The message displays  in the preview window    When the First Page Only box is checked  the watermark  prints on the first page only    4 Select watermark options    You can select the font name  style  size  or grayscale  level from the Fon
228. op Clear to return to ready mode        a    PRINTING SCAN CONFIRMATION REPORT  AUTOMATICALLY    You can set your machine to print a confirmation report showing whether a  transmission was successful  how many pages were sent  and more  The  report shows the job of scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP     1  Press Scan Email    2  Press Menu  f5  until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    3  Press OK when Send Report appears     4  Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  and press OK     e On Error  Only in case of error occurrence  the machine prints the report     e On  The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or  failed     e Off  No report is printed after completing a job        Scanning 47    5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK       You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently  via SyncThru   Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email  addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in Address  Book     Registering speed email numbers   1  Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  to access the web site of your machine    2  Click Machine Settings and E mail Setup    Click Individual Address Book and Add    4  Select a location number and enter the user name and e mail address  you want    5  Click Apply     Z You can also click Import and obtain your address book from yo
229. operties   3 The Printer Properties window opens     3 Printer Properties    General   Connection   Driver   Jobs   Classes               Name          Location     A    Description                        Help      OK   Cancel          The following five tabs display at the top of the window       General  allows you to change the printer location and  name  The name entered in this tab displays on the  printer list in Printers configuration       Connection  allows you to view or select another port  If  you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice  versa while in use  you must re configure the printer port  in this tab    eDriver  allows you to view or select another printer  driver  By clicking Options  you can set the default  device options       Jobs  shows the list of print jobs  Click Cancel job to  cancel the selected job and select the Show completed  jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list     Classes  shows the class that your printer is in  Click  Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or  click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the  selected class    4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer   Properties Window     37  Using Your Printer in Linux          Printing a Document    Printing from Applications    There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to   print from using Common UNIX Printing System  CUPS   You   can print on your machine from any such application    1 From the applicati
230. or Multi Purpose Tray  Tray n     Type   Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from  which you want to print  This will let you get the best quality  printout  If not  print quality may not be acheived as you want     e Thin Paper  Less than 19 Ib  70 g m   thin paper   e Thick Paper  24 Ib to 32 Ib  90 120 g m   thick paper        Bond Paper  When you use the bond paper  select this  option     Basic Printing    16      Cotton Paper  20 Ib to 24 Ib  75 90 g m   cotton paper such  as Gilbert 25   and Gilbert 100         Archive Paper  When you need to keep print out for a long  period time such as archives  select this option      Plain Paper  Normal plain paper  Select this type if your  printer is monochrome and printing on the 16 Ib  60 g m    cotton paper       Recycled Paper  20 Ib to 24 Ib  75 90 g m   recycled paper     e Color Paper  20 Ib to 24 Ib  75 90 g m   color   backgrounded paper     First Page   This property allows you to print the first page using a different  paper type from the rest of the document  You can select the  paper source for the first page    For example  load thick stock for the first page into the Multi   purpose Tray  and plain paper into Tray n  Then  select Tray n in  the Source option and Multi Purpose Tray in the First Page  option  If this option does not appear  your printer does  not have this feature     Scaling Printing   Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale   your print job on a page  You 
231. ost Computer  aasam aaa a NA bin bass ka ee abv SO vena beeen ha 26  Setting Up a Client Computer 00 0    EE Ente need 26    Chapter 7  SCANNI NG    Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office            aaaaaaaawawanan netted 27  Using Samsung SmarThru Office   20    ernie 27  Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office 2 0 0    eens 29  Using Onscreen Help NE aaa cares a AA AA pa hang 29   Scanning Process with TWAI N enabled Software              2 2 saaaaaaaanan nanana nna a aNG nanan nn eee nent nantes 29   Scanning Using the WIA Driver            cece eniinn aeaa aE A aT AEE EEA EE KAKANAN ANAN E REN ARAA an nananana 29  Windows XP amma Baha E aan Dn nhan 29  Windows  Vista  maaawa hinamak makapa naasa aahon oE D EE EE E Pha maana 29    Chapter 8  USING SMART PANEL    Understanding Smart Panel         22 20200242 4240440404 Etat neta eee 30  Opening the Troubleshooting Guide         naaa anan anan NN GANAN AN ENGR NENE NER ANGARA ANENENERCN KG EEEE EEEE 31  Using  Printer Settings Utility serisinin tanaira na nE BBN NAGDAAN EE EENE 31   Using Onscreen Help File  apan anan h apan ANA haa nha aba 31  Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings                   a cece eee eee KANAN KN NAKAKA Na EEEE EEEE Ent 31    Chapter 9  USING YOUR PRINTER IN LINUX    Getting Started                aaaa aaa aa anan anG ANG NENA N AN AE NANANA NAN AES NEN AN ANAN NANANA NA NANRALENANENENEEEANESENAARANENENENCKKN KAKA 32  Installing the Unified Linux Driver sisese issor ip GA GG NA NAGANA neta eae ene
232. ot find the printer  then follow the  next step     8 Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window    9 Inthe Select a Printer Port window  select Have  Disk       10 click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer   ex  Windows XP 32 bit    Select CD ROM drive  gt  Printer  gt  PC MONO   gt   WINXP 2000 VISTA 32    11 Select    inf file and click Open   12 Click OK in the I nstall From Disk window                       No ul    Installing Printer Software in Windows    13 Select a mono driver in the Printers field  and click Next        NOTE  If you have installed a mono driver before  then the  Use Existing Driver window  Select as the window explains   and click Next  Also  depending on your computer  configuration  the printer sharing window or the print the test  page window may appear  make the appropriate selection        14 Enter your printer name  and click Next   15 Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver     16 Nore  If your printer is connected to a network  go to  printer s Properties and select the Ports tab  then click  Add Portand Standard TCP  IP Port  and create a new  port to connect to the printer  To create a new port  follow  the procedure laid out in the wizard window     13  Installing Printer Software in Windows    2 Basic Printing         This chapter explains the printing options and common printing   tasks in Windows    This chapter includes    e Printing a Document     e Printing to a file  PRN      e Printer Settings    Layo
233. ot network machines from any site with corporate  internet access  Download this program from http     solution samsungprinter com    e SyncThru   Web Service  Web server embedded on your  network print server  which allows you to      Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to  connect to various network environments     Customize machine settings      SetIP  Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and   manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol     Using the SetIP program    This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is  the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface   Especially  it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at  the same time     Installing the program  1  Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine  When the driver  CD runs automatically  close the window     2  Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive   X represents your CD   ROM drive      Double click Application  gt  SetIP    Open the folder of the language you plan to use    Double click Setup exe to install this program    Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation     Papo    26 Getting started       Starting the program    1  From the Windows Start menu  select All Programs  gt  Samsung  Network Printer Utilities 5 SetIP     2  Select the name of your printer and click zx    If you cannot find your printer name  click    to refresh
234. ould not be  mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal     pa    CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT        Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems     This marking on the battery  manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household  waste at the end of their working life  Where marked  the chemical symbols Hg  Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury  cadmium  or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66  If batteries are not properly disposed of  these substances can cause harm to  human health or the environment     To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse  please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through  your local  free battery return system     Safety information 7    RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS       FCC Information to the User  This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules  Operation is subject to the following two conditions     e This device may not cause harmful interference  and  e This device must accept any interference received  including interference that may cause undesired operation     This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device  pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules  These  limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation  This equipment 
235. over of reverse unit area    Page 73  Page 75       Reverse Jam 1    In the rear cover or in the    Page 73  Page 76          Check Inside cover of reverse unit area   Remove Paper Inside rear cover Page 76  in Rear Cover   Duplex Jam 0 Inside the machine Page 73  Check Inside       Duplex Jam 1  Open Close Door       In the paper feed area or  inside the machine       Page 73  Page 75       Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options    or models     A   To avoid tearing the paper  pull the jammed paper out gently and  slowly  Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the    jam     In the paper feed area  If paper is jammed in the paper feed area  follow the next steps to release    the jammed paper     1  Using the handle  completely open the front cover           2  Carefully remove the paper by pulling in the direction as shown below   Go to step 7        If you cannot find the jammed paper  or if there is any resistance  removing the paper  stop pulling  and go to step 3     A      Do not touch the green surface  the OPC drum or the front of   each toner cartridge  with your hands or any other material   Use the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching  this area    e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt    e If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes   the OPC drum can be exposed to light  This will cause  damage to the OPC drum  Close the front cover should the  installatio
236. page    e The surface of the LSU part inside the  machine may be dirty  Clean the LSU   contact a service representative    If vertical streaks appear on the page    e The surface of the scanner glass and its  white sheet may be dirty  Clean these unit   See 65   If this problem persists  contact a  service representative        Color or Black  background          AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc             If the amount of background shading becomes   unacceptable    e Change to a lighter weight paper  See  page 33    e Check the machine s environment  very dry   low humidity  or high humidity  higher than  80  RH  conditions can increase the  amount of background shading    e Remove the old toner cartridge and install  a new one  See page 66                 CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS          CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  Toner smear e Clean the inside of the machine  See page   63    AaBbCc   Check the paper type and quality  See page  33    AaBhCc    Remove the toner cartridge and install a   AaBhCc new one  See page 66    AaBbCc          AaBbCc       Vertical repetitive  defects    AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc_  AaBbCc          If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side   of the page at even intervals       The toner cartridge may be damaged  If a  repetitive mark occurs on the page  print a  cleaning sheet several times to clean the  cartridge  After the printout  if you still have  the same problems  remove the toner  cartridge and install a new one
237. pears   Select the printer you want to install from the list and then    click Next     a A  Select Printer Port an     Select a port that will be used for your printer      UG TCP IP Port  C Shared Printer  UNC     C Add TCP IP Port      Select a printer from the list below  If you don t see your printer below  click   Update  to refresh the list     Printer Name IP Port Name                   NOTE  If a firewall has been enabled on this PC  this may be preventing ti  the installer from detecting the printer  Temporarily disable the firewall on date    this PC before continuing with the installation      lt Back  re  Cancel          e If you do not see your printer on the list  click Update to  refresh the list  or select Add TCP  IP Port to add your  printer to the network  To add the printer to the  network  enter the port name and the IP address for the  printer     To verify your printer s  P address or the MAC address   print a Network Configuration page in machine     e To find a shared network printer  UNC Path   select  Shared Printer  UNC  and enter the shared name  manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  button        NOTE  If you cannot find your machine in network  please  turn off the firewall and click Update    For Windows operating system  click Start     Control Panel  and start windows firewall  and set this option unactivated   For other operating system  refer to its on line guide        6 After the installation is finished  a window app
238. peed dial  numbers    Registering a speed dial number   1  Press Fax     2  Press Address Book until New  amp  Edit appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    3  Press OK when Speed Dial appears    4  Enter a speed dial number between 0 and 239 and press OK   If an entry is already stored in the number you choose  the display  shows the name to allow you to change it  To start over with another  speed dial number  press Back  429     5  Enter the name you want and press OK   For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters  see page 29    6  Enter the fax number you want and press OK     Faxing 57    7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Editing speed dial numbers    1  Press Address Book until New  amp  Edit appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK     Press OK when Speed Dial appears    Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK   Change the name and press OK    Change the fax number and press OK    Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     DAAN    Using speed dial numbers    When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a   fax  enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you   want    e For a one digit  0 9  speed dial number  press and hold the  corresponding digit button on the number keypad    e Fora two  or three digit speed dial number  press the first digit  button s  and then hold down the last digit button     You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing
239. pen  After you pull it all the way out  lift up the  front part of the tray slightly to release the tray from the machine                 6  Close the front cover firmly  The machine will resume printing     AN If the front cover is not completely closed  the machine will not    2  operate              3  Slide the tray back into the machine   4  Open the front cover                 Troubleshooting 77    UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES          Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine s  status or errors  Refer to the tables below to understand the messages   meaning and correct the problem if necessary  Messages and their    meanings are listed in alphabetical order     L  e If the message is not in the table  cycle the power and try the  printing job again  If the problem persists  call for service   e Some messages may not appear in the display depending on    options or models       xxx indicates the media type   e Yyy indicates the tray        SUGGESTED  MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS  Cancel  Your machine   s To cancel the fax job    lt 4 Yes P gt  memory has become   press the OK button to    full while trying to  store an original into  memory     accept Yes    If you want to send those  pages that have been  successfully stored   press the OK button to  accept No  You should  send the remaining  pages later  when  memory is available              Connection Error    Connection with the  SMTP server failed     Check the server  settings and the n
240. per  width guides       Front cover    Toner cartridge       Front cover handle    Paper transfer belt       Multi purpose tray handle    Scanner lid       HC    O Coe    Multi purpose tray    AHAB O BEB    Scanner lock switch           9  Tray 1 Scanner glass  Document input tray  21  Scan unit   11  Document output tray             a  CLX 6200FX has the ADF function  while CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX   and CLX 6240FX have the duplex ADF function  See page 49     Rear view                                           USB port Power switch       Network port Power receptacle       External device interface   EDI      15 pin optional tray  connection       Telephone line socket  Control board cover       Extension telephone socket     EXT   Rear cover       Handle Cable organizer    000000       O    O OO       a  CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only     b  External device interface for Samsung and third party solutions   CLX   6240FX only      Introduction_ 19    CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW       CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only       CREM D       0  are    Banana     Ce            Speed buttons    Allows you to store frequently dialed fax  numbers and enter them with the touch of a few  buttons     Selects the document type for the current copy          Shift    Allows you to shift the speed buttons to access  numbers 16 through 30        Address Book    Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers  in memory or search for stored fax numbers or  email addresses     Original 
241. phics    The Graphics tab provides options for selecting  Resolution Quality  and Color Mode  Select Graphics  form the Presets  drop down list to access the graphic                         features        Printer    rj  Presets  Standard rs   Graphics HE                  Quality              i  O Best  s   Normal  Color Mode    j     Color    O Grayscale               PDFv     Preview     Cancel      AMac OS 10 4     Resolution  Quality   You can select the printing  resolution  The higher the setting  the sharper the clarity  of printed characters and graphics  The higher setting  also may increase the time it takes to print a document        Color Mode  You can set the color options  Setting to  Color typically produces the best possible print quality  for color documents  If you want to print a color  document in grayscale  select Grayscale     Paper    Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray  from which you want to print  This will let you get the best  quality printout  If you load a different type of print material   select the corresponding paper type                             Printer  13    Presets  Standard N3   Paper 13          Paper Type   Printer Default Ha               PDF v Preview      Cancel      Crore  rere   Caneel         A Mac OS 10 4       45    Printer Features    This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and  adjusting print quality  Select Printer Features from the  Presets  drop down list to access the following 
242. ple Send operation between stations  i e    when the transmission to station A ends  before transmission to station B  begins  or between redial attempts     1   2     Press Fax    Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original  face down on the scanner glass    For details about loading an original  see page 32    Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs  See  page 51    Press Menu    2   until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Priority Send appears and press OK   Enter the number of the receiving machine    You can use speed buttons  speed dial numbers  or group dial numbers   For details  see page 57    Press OK to confirm the number    Enter the job name you want and press OK    The original is scanned into memory before transmission  The display  shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in  memory    If an original is placed on the scanner glass  select Yes to add another  page  Load another original and press OK    When you have finished  select No at the Another Page  prompt    The machine shows the number being dialed and begins sending the  fax     Forwarding faxes    You can forward your incoming and outgoing faxes to another fax machine  or email address     Forwarding sent faxes to another fax machine    You can set the machine to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a  specified destination  in addition to the fax numbers yo
243. ple copies of a document  the  printer may not print the document in the way you  want  In case of  Collated copy    if your document has  odd pages  the last page of the first copy and the first  page of the next copy will be printed on the front and  back of one sheet  In case of  Uncollated copy   the  same page will be printed on the front and back of one  sheet  Therefore  if you need multiple copies of a  document and you want those copies on both sides of  the paper  you must print them one at a time  as  separate print jobs        Using Your Printer with a Macintosh          Scanning    You can scan docoments using Image Capture program   Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program     Scanning with USB    1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  and properly connected to each other     2 Placea single document face down on the document glass   OR load the document s  face up into the ADF  or DADF      3 Start Applications and click Image Capture        NOTE   f No Image Capture device connected message  appears  disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it  If the  problem persists  please refer to the Image Capture s help        4 Set the scan options on this program     5 Scan and save your scanned image        NOTE     e For more information about using Image Capture  please  refer to the Image Capture s help    e If you want to scan via the DADF  use TWAIN comliant  softwares    e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant softwares  such as  Adobe Photo
244. plex button on your machine  you can set the machine to  scan on both sides of paper   CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only   1  Press Duplex   2  Press the left right arrow until the binding option you want appears   e Off  Scans in Normal mode   e 2Side  Scans both sides of the original   e 2  gt 1Side ROT2  Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on  a separate sheet  but the information on the back side of the printout is  rotated 180     3  Press OK to save your selection   If the mode is enabled  the Duplex button is backlit        Scanning_ 49    basic printing       This chapter explains common printing tasks     This chapter includes     e Printing a document    PRINTING A DOCUMENT       Your machine allows you to print from various Windows  Macintosh  or  Linux applications  The exact steps for printing a document may vary  depending on the application you use    For details about printing  see the Software section     CANCELING A PRINT JOB       If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler  such as the printer  group in Windows  delete the job as follows   1  Click the Windows Start menu   2  For Windows 2000  select Settings and then Printers   For Windows XP 2003  select Printers and Faxes   For Windows Vista  select Control Panel 5 Hardware and Sound 5  Printers   3  Double click the Samsung CLX 6200 Series or CLX 6240 Series icon    Or Samsung CLX 6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX 6240 Series PS   4  From the Document menu  select C
245. pper level   Press the left right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK     8  Press the left right arrow until the paper type you are using appears and  press OK     9  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     NG    Z If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper  select  Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties  See Software  section     copying       This chapter gives you step by step instructions for copying documents     This chapter includes     Selecting the paper tray   Copying   Changing the settings for each copy  Changing the scan size settings  Changing the default copy settings    SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY       After loading the print media for copy output  you must select the paper tray  you will use for copy jobs     1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Paper Source appears and press OK   Press OK when Copy Tray appears     Press the left right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  press OK     Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     AON    D    COPYING       1  Press Copy   Ready to Copy appears on the top line of the display   2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original  face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32   Enter the number of copies using the number keypad  if necessar
246. printer card or interface  Especially  it is for the network  administrator to set several network IPs at the same time     You can only use Setl P program when your machine is  connected to a network     SetI P program should be automatically installed during the  printer driver installation     Starting the program   1 Print the machine s network information report which  includes your machine s MAC address    Open the   opt  Samsung  mfp  share  utils     Double click the Setl PApplet html file     Click    in the SetlP window to open the TCP IP  configuration window    Enter the network card s MAC address  IP address  subnet  mask  default gateway  and then click Apply     ul A WN          NOTE  when you enter the MAC address  enter it without  colon           6 The machine prints the network information  Confirm all  the settings are correct   7 Close the SetI P program        Using the Unified Driver  Configurator    Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for  configuring Printer or MFP devices  Since an MFP device  combines the printer and scanner  the Unified Linux Driver  Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and  scanner functions  There is also a special MFP port option  responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and  scanner via a single I O channel    After installing the Unified Linux driver  the Unified Linux Driver  Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop     Opening the Unif
247. printer prints only the odd  numbered pages of the document      Print Even Pages  Your printer prints only the even  numbered pages of the document    Use Printer Fonts  When Use Printer Fonts is checked  the   printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory  resident   fonts  to print your document  rather than downloading the  fonts used in your document  Because downloading fonts takes  time  selecting this option can speed up your printing time    When using Printer fonts  the printer will try to match the fonts   used in your document to those stored in its memory  If    however  you use fonts in your document that are very different  from those resident in the printer  your printed output will  appear very different from what it looks like on the screen    This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6   printer driver      Save as Form for Overlay  Select Save as Form for Overlay to  save the document as a form file  C  FORMOVER   FOM   Once  this option is selected  the printer driver requires the file name  and the destination path each time you print  If you want to  preset the file name and specify the path  click on the button in  the Output to area  and type the file name and specify the path   This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6  printer driver     J ob Setting   Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the  printing file by using the optional HDD  Some printers do not  support this feature        Using Onscreen
248. r for computer  networking  It was included in the original Macintosh  1984  and is now  deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking     FDI    Foreign Device Interface  FDI  is a card installed inside the machine to  allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card  reader  Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine     FTP    A File Transfer Protocol  FTP  is a commonly used protocol for  exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol   such as the Internet or an intranet      Fuser Unit    The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media  It  consists of a hot roller and a back up roller  After toner is transferred  onto the paper  the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that  the toner stays on the paper permanently  which is why paper is warm  when it comes out of a laser printer     Gateway    A connection between computer networks  or between a computer  network and a telephone line  It is very popular  as it is a computer or a  network that allows access to another computer or network     Grayscale    A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image  when color images are converted to grayscale  colors are represented  by various shades of gray     Halftone    An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots   Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots  while lighter  areas consist of a smaller number of dots     HDD    Ha
249. r glass and align it with the  registration guide at the top left corner of the glass        3  Close the scanner lid     L e Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality   and toner consumption    e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout   Always keep it clean    e If you are copying a page from a book or magazine  lift the scanner  lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid   If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm  start copying with  the lid open     In the DADF  or ADF     Using the DADF  or ADF   you can load up to 50 sheets of paper  75 g m    20 Ib bond  for one job     When you use the DADF  or ADF      e In the ADF  Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm  5 6 x  5 8 inches  or larger than 216 x 356 mm  8 5 x 14 inches     e In the DADF  Do not load paper smaller than 148 x 148 mm  5 8 x  5 8 inches  or larger than 216 x 356 mm  8 5 x 14 inches       Do not attempt to load the following types of paper     carbon paper or carbon backed paper    coated paper    onion skin or thin paper    wrinkled or creased paper    curled or rolled paper    torn paper   e Remove all staples and paper clips before loading    e Make sure any glue  ink  or correction fluid on the paper is completely  dry before loading    e Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper     e Do not load booklets  pamphlets  transparencies  or documents having  other unusual characteristics     1
250. r tab in printer driver   s properties  See  page 28        Copying problems       CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS       Copies are too light  or too dark     Use Darkness to darken or lighten the  background of the copies           86 _ Troubleshooting       Scanning problems       CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS    Samsung Scan Manager problems          The scanner does  not work     Make sure that you place the original to be  scanned face down on the scanner glass  or  face up in the DADF  or ADF     There may not be enough available memory  to hold the document you want to scan  Try  the Prescan function to see if that works  Try  lowering the scan resolution rate    Check that the USB cable is connected  properly    Make sure that the USB cable is not  defective  Switch the cable with a known  good cable  If necessary  replace the cable   Check that the scanner is configured  correctly  Check scan setting in the  SmarThru Configuration or the application  you want to use to make certain that the  scanner job is being sent to the correct port     CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS         cannot use the  Samsung Scan  Manager        Check your operating system  Supporting  operating systems are Windows 2000 XP   Vista        Fax problems     CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only        CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS       The machine is not  working  there is no  display and the  buttons are not  working     Unplug the power cord and plug it in again   Ensure that th
251. ransparencies which can  be used on a printer  a scanner  a fax or  a copier     PPM    Pages Per Minute  PPM  is a method of measurement for determining  how fast a printer works  meaning the number of pages a printer can  produce in one minute     PRN file    An interface for a device driver  this allows software to interact with the  device driver using standard input output system calls  which simplifies  many tasks     Protocol    A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection   communication  and data transfer between two computing endpoints     PS  See PostScript     PSTN    The Public Switched Telephone Network  PSTN  is the network of the  world s public circuit switched telephone networks which  on industrial  premises  is usually routed through the switchboard     Resolution    The sharpness of an image  measured in Dots Per Inch  DPI   The  higher the dpi  the greater the resolution     SMB    Server Message Block  SMB  is a network protocol mainly applied to  share files  printers  serial ports  and miscellaneous communications  between nodes on a network  It also provides an authenticated Inter   process communication mechanism     SMTP    Simple Mail Transfer Protocol  SMTP  is the standard for e mail  transmissions across the Internet  SMTP is a relatively simple  text   based protocol  where one or more recipients of a message are  specified  and then the message text is transferred  It is a client server  protocol  where the client transmit
252. rd Disk Drive  HDD   commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard  disk  is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data  on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces     IEEE    The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  IEEE  is an  international non profit  professional organization for the advancement  of technology related to electricity     IEEE 1284    The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of  Electrical and Electronics Engineers  IEEE   The term  1284 B  refers to  a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to  the peripheral  for example  a printer         Intranet    A private network that uses Internet Protocols  network connectivity  and  possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of  an organization s information or operations with its employees   Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service  the internal  website     IP address    An Internet Protocol  IP  address is a unique number that devices use in  order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing  the Internet Protocol standard     IPM    The Images Per Minute  IPM  is a way of measuring the speed of a  printer  An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer  can complete within one minute     IPP    The Internet Printing Protocol  IPP  defines a standard protocol for  printing as well as managing print jobs  media size  resolution  
253. rd disk  you need to select it in the printer properties to  enable its use  Take the following steps     1   2     5     Click the Windows Start menu    For Windows 2000  select Settings and then Printers    For Windows XP 2003  select Printers and Faxes    For Windows Vista  select Control Panel  gt  Hardware and Sound  gt    Printers    Select the Samsung CLX 6200 Series or CLX 6240 Series printer icon   or Samsung CLX 6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX 6240 Series PS   printer icon    Right click on the printer icon and select Properties    e Samsung CLX 6200 Series or CLX 6240 Series  Click the Printer  tab and then check Optional Hard Disk Drive  HDD     e Samsung CLX 6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX 6240 Series PS   Click the Device Option or Device Settings tab and set the  Optional Hard Disk Drive  HDD  option to Installedd   Click OK     Printing with the optional hard disk   After installing the optional hard disk  you can use advanced printing  features  such as storing or spooling a print job to the hard disk  proofing a  job  and specifying of printing a private job in the printer properties window   Once you have stored files in the hard disk  you can easily print or delete  the stored files using the control panel of your printer     Storing a job   You can store jobs in the installed hard disk    1  Open the file you want to store    2  Select Print from the File menu  The Print window displays    3  Click Properties  If you see Setup  Print or Options  click the  bu
254. re you set the altitude value  find the altitude where you are using the  machine                    2 000 m  1 Normal  1 000 m    2 High 1  3 High 2  a 4 High 3       1  Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided  Printer Software CD    2  Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar  or   Notification Area in Linux     You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X    Click Printer Setting     4  Click Setting 5 Altitude Adjustment  Select the appropriate value from  the dropdown list  and then click Apply     If your machine is connected to a network  SyncThru Web  Service screen appears automatically  Click Machine Settings 5  Setup  or Machine Setup   gt  Altitude adj   Select the appropriate  altitude value  and then click Apply           Changing the display language   To change the language that appears on the control panel  follow these   steps    1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears    3  Press the left right arrow until Language appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the language you want appears and press  OK     5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Setting the date and time    The current date and time are shown on the display when your machine is  on and ready to work  For the CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX  all  of your faxes will have the date and time printed on them     1  
255. ready  mode     USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES       You can use the following copy features     Collation  You can set the machine to sort the copy job  For example  if you make 2  copies of a 3 page original  one complete 3 page document will print  followed by a second complete document   1  Press Copy   2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or 1    aj  place a single original face down on the scanner glass      For details about loading an original  see page 32   3  Enter the number of copies using the number keypad   4  Press Menu    2  until Copy Feature appears on the 1    s  bottom line of the display and press OK   Press OK when Copy Collation appears   6  Press the left right arrow to select the color mode you  want   There are two types of mode as following   e Yes Color  Color copy  e Yes Mono  Black and White copy  7  Press OK to begin copying   One complete document will print followed by the second complete  document                                      a    2 up or 4 up copying  Your machine can print 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet  of paper    1  Press Copy              2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or          place a single original face down on the scanner glass  Hi i  For details about loading an original  see page 32  MM Ji   3  Press Menu  F3  until Copy Feature appears on the   MUYUN        bottom line of the display and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until 2 Up or 4 Up appears  and press O
256. receive the fax     L  e Ifyou have set your machine to Ans Fax mode and your  answering machine is switched off  or no answering machine is  connected to EXT socket  your machine automatically goes into  Fax mode after a predefined number of rings    e If your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter  set  the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring    e If you are in Tel mode  manual reception  when the answering  machine is connected to your machine  you must switch off the  answering machine  or the outgoing message from the answering  machine will interrupt your phone conversation        Receiving faxes using DRPD mode    Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to  use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers   The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different  ringing patterns  which consist of various combinations of long and short  ringing sounds  This feature is often used by answering services who  answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which  number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone     Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  DRPD  feature  your fax  machine can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered by the fax  machine  Unless you change it  this ringing pattern will continue to be  recognized and answered as a fax call  and all other ringing patterns will be  forwarded to the extension telephone or ans
257. ridge is not installed  Install the    toner cartridge     e If a system error occurs  contact your service    representative     Half the page is  blank     The page orientation  setting may be  incorrect     Change the page orientation  in your application  See the  printer driver help screen        The paper size and  the paper size  settings do not  match     Ensure that the paper size in  the printer driver settings  matches the paper in the  tray    Or  ensure that the paper  size in the printer driver  settings matches the paper  selection in the software  application settings you use           The connection  cable between the  computer and the  machine is not    connected properly     Disconnect the printer cable  and reconnect it        The connection  cable between the  computer and the  machine is  defective     If possible  attach the cable  to another computer that is  working properly and print a  job  You can also try using a  different printer cable        The port setting is  incorrect     Check the Windows printer  setting to make sure that the  print job is sent to the correct  port  If the computer has  more than one port  make  sure that the machine is  attached to the correct one     The machine  prints  but the  text is wrong   garbled  or  incomplete     The printer cable is  loose or defective     Disconnect the printer cable  and reconnect  Try a print job  that you have already printed  successfully  If possible   attach the cable and the  machine 
258. ring repairs  Such repairs are not covered by Samsung   s  warranty or service agreements     1  To load paper  pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the  side you want to print facing up           1 Full          2 Empty       2  After loading paper  set the paper type and size for the tray 1  See  Software section for PC printing     L  e If you experience problems with paper feed  place one sheet at a  time in the multi purpose tray    e You can load previously printed paper  The printed side should be  facing down with an uncurled edge at the front  If you experience  problems with paper feed  turn the paper around  Note that print  quality is not guaranteed     Loading paper in the multi purpose tray    The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material   such as postcards  note cards  and envelopes  It is useful for single page  printing on letterhead or colored paper     Tips on using the multi purpose tray   e Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray    e To prevent paper jams  do not add paper when there is still paper in  the multi purpose tray  This also applies to other types of print  media    e Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into  the multi purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray    e Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and  print quality problems   See  Selecting print media  on page 33     e Flatten any curl on postcards
259. rint and click Open   The PDF file is added in the Select Files section    4 Customize the printer settings for your needs  See the  next column    5 Click Print     The selected PDF file is sent to the printer     Using the shortcut icon    1 Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to  the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top     The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer        NOTE   If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility   the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer  opens  Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section        2 Customize the printer settings for your needs   3 Click Print   The selected PDF file is sent to the printer     Using the right click menu    1 Right click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct  Printing   The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is  added    2 Select the printer you will use    3 Customize the printer settings for your needs  See the  below part    4 Click Print     The selected PDF file is sent to the printer           Sharing the Printer Setting Up a Host Computer    Loca   ly 1 Start Windows   2 From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes   You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer  3 Double click your printer driver icon   which is called    host computer     on the network             i 4 From the Printer menu  select Sharing   The following procedure is for Windows XP 
260. river settings are  saved     To use a saved setting  select the item from the Favorites drop  down list  The printer is now set to print according to the  Favorites setting you selected     To delete a Favorites item  select it from the list and click  Delete     You can also restore the printer driver s default settings by  selecting Printer Default from the list     Using Help    Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking  the Help button in the printer properties window  These help  screens give detailed information about the printer features  provided by the printer driver     You can also click     from the upper right corner of the  window  and then click on any setting     Advanced Printing    This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing  tasks                 NOTE        e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use   However the composition of the printer properties window is                            similar       If you need to know the exact name of your printer  you can  check the supplied CD ROM        This chapter includes     e Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper  N Up  Printing     e Printing Posters   e Printing Booklets   e Printing on Both Sides of Paper   e Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document   e Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size  e Using Watermarks   e Using Overlays    19  Advanced Printing       Printing Multiple Pa
261. roup  JBIG  is an image compression  standard with no loss of accuracy or quality  which was designed for  compression of binary images  particularly for faxes  but can also be  used on other images     JPEG    Joint Photographic Experts Group  JPEG  is a most commonly used  standard method of lossy compression for photographic images  It is the  format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide  Web     LDAP    The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol  LDAP  is a networking  protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP   IP     Glossary_ 103    LED    A Light Emitting Diode  LED  is a semiconductor device that indicates  the status of a machine     MAC address    Media Access Control  MAC  address is a unique identifier associated  with a network adapter  MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually  written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs  e  g   00 00 0c   34 11 4e   This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface  Card  NIC  by its manufacturer  and used as an aid for routers trying to  locate machines on large networks     MFP    Multi Function Peripheral  MFP  is an office machine that includes the  following functionality in one physical body  so as to have a printer  a  copier  a fax  a scanner and etc     MH    Modified Huffman  MH  is a compression method for decreasing the  amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines  to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T
262. rrow until the user s name and file name you  want appear and press OK     5  If the select file is a confidential print job  enter the specified 4 digit  password   Press the left right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK  The  cursor automatically moves to the next digit position  Enter the 2nd   3rd  and 4th digit in the same way    6  Press the left right arrow until Cancel appears and press OK     If you enter the incorrect password  Invalid Password appears   Reenter the correct password     7  Press the left right arrow until Yes appears and press OK     To promote a file from the queue     You can select a job waiting in the Active Job Queue and change its  print order so that it can be printed sooner     1  Press Menu  13  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK     Installing accessories_ 97    4  Press the left right arrow until the user s name and file name you  want appear and press OK    5  If the select file is a confidential print job  enter the specified 4 digit  password   Press the left right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK  The  cursor automatically moves to the next digit position  Enter the 2nd   3rd  and 4th digit in the same way    6  Press the left right arrow until Promote appears and press OK   If you enter the incorrect password  Invalid Password appears 
263. rtPanel program window appears on the computer telling you  which color cartridge is low on toner     1  Using the handle  completely open the front cover        A   Do not touch the green surface  the OPC drum or the front of the  toner cartridge  with your hands or any other material  Use the  handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area    e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt    e If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes  the  OPC drum can be exposed to light  This will cause damage to the  OPC drum  Close the front cover should the installation need to  be halted for any reason     66 Maintenance       2  Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the  cartridge from the machine        A When you open the front cover  be careful not to touch the  underneath of the control panel  the lower part of the fuser unit   The  temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your  skin           When you open the front cover and work inside the machine  it is  highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first   Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt     3  Holding both handles on the toner cartridge  thoroughly rock it from side  to side to evenly distribute the toner     Bay        L  If toner gets on your clothing  wipe it off with a dry  cloth and wash it in cold water  Hot water sets toner into  fabric     4  Slide the toner cartridge back in
264. s all of the fax options to the factory default   Copy Setup Restores all of the copy options to the factory    default        Scan Setup Restores all of the scan options to the factory    default        System Setup Restores all of the system options to the factory    default        Network Restores all of the network options to the factory  default        Address Book Clears all of the fax number and email address    entries stored in memory        Sent Report Clears all records of sent faxes and emails        Fax RCV Report   Clears all records of received faxes        NetScan Report   Clears the information on network scan sessions in  memory           Press OK when Yes appears    Press OK again to confirm clearing    Repeat steps 3 through 5 to clear another item   Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     NO          CLEANING YOUR MACHINE    To maintain print and scan quality  follow the cleaning procedures below  each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality  problems occur        A e Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials  containing large amounts of alcohol  solvent  or other strong  substances can discolor or distort the cabinet    e If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner  we  recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to  clean it  If you use a vacuum cleaner  toner blown into the air may  be harmful     Cleaning the outside   Clean the cabinet of the machine with a soft lint free
265. s an email message to the server     Subnet Mask    The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to  determine which part of the address is the network address and which  part is the host address     TCP IP    The Transmission Control Protocol  TCP  and the Internet Protocol  IP    the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack  on which the Internet and most commercial networks run     TCR    Transmission Confirmation Report  TCR  provides details of each  transmission such as job status  transmission result and number of  pages sent  This report can be set to print after each job or only after  failed transmissions     TIFF    Tagged Image File Format  TIFF  is a variable resolution bitmapped  image format  TIFF describes image data that typically come from  scanners  TIFF images make use of tags  keywords defining the  characteristics of the image that is included in the file  This flexible and  platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been  made by various image processing applications     Toner Cartridge    A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner  Toner  is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers  which forms the text  and images on the printed paper  Toner can be melted by the heat of the  fuser  causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper     TWAIN    An industry standard for scanners and software  By using a TWAIN   compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program  a
266. s or All Programs      your printer driver name     Maintenance    3 Select Remove and click Next   You will see a component list so that you can remove any  item individually    4 Select the components you want to remove and then click  Next    5 When your computer asks you to confirm your selection   click Yes   The selected driver and all of its components are removed  from your computer   After the software is removed  click Finish     12       Installing mono printer driver    This printer features a monochrome only printer  This mono  driver limits output to th black toner  You must install the mono  driver on your computer  Following steps guide you through the  step by step installation process   Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  and powered on  Or your computer and printer are  connected to the network    2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive  The  CD ROM should automatically run  and an installation  window appears    3 Click Cancel     x        It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before  running Setup        Select a language from the list below       English z    Cancel    If the confirmation window appears  click Finish    Click Start     Printers and Faxes    Select Add Printer    When Add Printer Wizard appears  click Next    Select Local printer attached to this computer  and  Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play  printer  then click Next  Go to step 13     If your computer does n
267. s using the printer driver    e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  using the current program  To make your changes  permanent  make them in the Printers folder    e The following procedure is for Windows XP  For other  Windows OS  refer to the corresponding Windows User s  Guide or online help    1  Click the Windows Start button    2  Select Printers and Faxes    3  Select your printer driver icon    4  Right click on the printer driver icon and select  Printing Preferences    5  Change the settings on each tab  click OK           24    Advanced    You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  button     a      Jeg             Ir    F4 PS Advanced Document Settings  c  Ba Paparloukpae        in  Graphic   fg Document Options                Cancel             Paper  Output this option allows you to select the size of the  paper loaded in the tray    e Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for  your specific printing needs      Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript  options or printer features     Using Help    You can click J from the upper right corner of the window  and  then click on any setting     Using Windows PostScript Driver       5 Using Direct Printing    Utility    This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF  files without having to open the files        CAUTION    e You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print   Deactivate the printing restrictio
268. s you  send        Check your scan unit for marks and clean it   See page 65           Troubleshooting_ 87          CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS       The machine dials a  number  but a  connection with the  other fax machine  fails     The other fax machine may be turned off  out  of paper  or cannot answer incoming calls   Speak with the other machine operator and  ask her him to sort out the problem     PROBLEM    POSSIBLE    CAUSE SOLUTION          Faxes do not store in  memory     There may not be enough memory space to  store the fax  If the display shows the Memory  Full message  delete from memory any faxes  ob nG longer need and then try again to store  the fax     When printing a       The resolution    Make sure that the resolution             Blank areas appear  at the bottom of each  page or on other  pages  with a small  strip of text at the  top        You may have chosen the wrong paper  settings in the user option setting  For details  about paper settings  see page 33              Common PostScript problems    The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when  several printer languages are being used     1g To receive a printed or screen displayed message when PostScript  errors occur  open the Print Options window and click the desired  selection next to the PostScript errors section       PROBLEM    POSSIBLE    CAUSE SOLUTION       PostScript file    The PostScript    e    Install the PostScript       cannot be driver may not be driv
269. selection    Recommended resolution settings for different original document types   are described in the table below                    Setting the fax header    In some countries  you are required by law to indicate your fax number on  any fax you send  The Machine ID  containing your telephone number and  name or company name  will be printed at the top of each page sent from  your machine    1  Press Menu  27  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears    3  Press OK when Machine ID appears    4  Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad  You  can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad  and  include special symbols by pressing the 0 button  For details on how to  enter alphanumeric characters  see page 29     Press OK to save the ID     Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK   Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     ONO    Adjusting the document settings  Before starting a fax  change the following settings according to your  original   s status to get the best quality    Resolution    The default document settings produce good results when using typical  text based originals  However  if you send originals that are of poor    MODE RECOMMENDED FOR    Standard Originals with normal sized characters    Fine Originals containing small characters or thin  lines or originals printed using a dot matrix  printer    Super Fine Originals containing ex
270. settings in the Printer Settings  Utility window  Any printers do not have this feature        NOTE  If you connect your printer to a network  the  SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the  Printer Settings Utility window        Driver Setting  Only for Windows    You can use the printer properties window  which allows you to  access all of the printer options you need for using your  printer  For details  See    Printer Settings    on page 15                 Opening the Troubleshooting  Guide    Using the troubleshooting guide  you can view solutions for  error status problems    Right click  in Windows or Linux  or click  in Mac OS X  the  Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide        Using Printer Settings Utility    Using the Printer Settings Utility  you can configure and check   print settings    1 Right click  in Windows or Linux  or click  in Mac OS X  the  Smart Panel icon and select Printer Setting    2 Change the settings    3 To send the changes to the printer  click the Apply button        NOTES  If your printer is connected to a network  the  SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the  Printer Settings Utility window        Using Onscreen Help File    For more information about Printer Settings Utility  click Q         Changing the Smart Panel Program  Settings  Right click  in Windows or Linux  or click  in Mac OS X  the    Smart Panel icon and select Options  Select the settings you                                                  
271. shop    e Scan process differ according to TWAIN compliant  softwares  Please refer to the user   s guide of the software    e If scanning does not operate in I mage Capture  update  Mac OS to the latest version  Image Capture operates  propery in Mac OS 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS 10 4 7 or  higher        Scanning with network    1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on     2 Place a single document face down on the document glass   OR load the document s  face up into the ADF  or DADF      3 Start Applications and click Image Capture   4 Click Devices and click Browse Devices     5 For MAC OS X 10 4   Select your machine in Twain devices option  Make sure  that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked  and click  Connect     47    For MAC OS X 10 5    Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside  your machine in Bonjour Devices    If you want to scan using TWAIN  refer to the MAC OS X  10 4 procedure above     6 Set the scan options on this program     7 Scan and save your scanned image        NOTE     e If you want to scan via the DADF  use TWAIN comliant  softwares        For more information about using Image Capture  please  refer to the Image Capture s help     e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant softwares  such as  Adobe Photoshop     e Scan process differ according to TWAIN compliant  softwares  Please refer to the user   s guide of the software     e If scanning does not operate in Image Capture  update  Mac OS to the latest version  I mag
272. should not  contain air      Condition  Envelopes should not be wrinkled   nicked  or otherwise damaged      Temperature  You should use envelopes that are  compatible with the heat and pressure of the  machine during operation    Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and   well creased folds    Do not use stamped envelopes    Do not use envelopes with clasps  snaps  windows    coated lining  self adhesive seals  or other synthetic   materials    Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes    Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope   extends all the way to the corner of the envelope     o DW  opal              Labels    To avoid damaging the machine  use only labels   designed for use in laser machines      When selecting labels  consider the following  factors      Adhesives  The adhesive material should be  stable at your machine   s fusing temperature   Check your machine   s specification to view the  fusing temperature  see page 99      Arrangement  Only use labels with no exposed  backing between them  Labels can peel off sheets  that have spaces between the labels  causing  serious jams      Curl  Prior to printing  labels must lie flat with no  more than 13 mm of curl in any direction      Condition  Do not use labels with wrinkles   bubbles  or other indications of separation    Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive   material between labels  Exposed areas can cause   labels to peel off during printing  which can cause  paper jams  Exposed adhesi
273. size    This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  glass     1  Press Copy           2  Place a single original face down on the scanner glass      For details about loading an original  see page 32      y  3  Press Menu  23  until Copy Feature appears on the aay  bottom line of the display and press OK    N  4  Press the left right arrow until Clone Copy appears as ws  and press OK  wy             5  Press the left right arrow to select the color mode you  want   There are two types of mode as following   e Yes Color  Color copy  e Yes Mono  Black and White copy  6  Press OK to begin copying   Z You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge button  while making a clone copy     Adjusting background images  You can set the machine to print an image without its background  This  copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when  copying an original containing color in the background  such as a  newspaper or a catalog   1  Press Copy   2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original  face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32        3  Press Menu  f3  until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK   4  Press the left right arrow until Adjust Bkgd  appears and press OK   5  Press the left right arrow until the binding option you want appears   e Off  Does not use this feature   e Auto  Optimizes the background   e Enhance 
274. ssing Stop Clear cancels the  changed settings and restores the defaults     ID CARD COPYING       Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet of A4   Letter   Legal     Folio   Oficio   Executive   B5   A5   or A6 sized paper   When you copy using this feature  the machine prints one side of the  original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half  without reducing the size of the original  This feature is helpful for copying a  small sized item  such as a name card   This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  glass   1  Press ID Copy   2  Place a single original face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32  5  3  Place Front Side and Press Start  appears on the  display   4  Press Color Start or Black Start   Your machine begins scanning the front side and  shows Place Back Side and Press Start        o                      gt     40 Copying       5  Open the scanner lid and turn the original over     Z If you press Stop Clear or if no buttons are pressed for  approximately 30 seconds  the machine cancels the copy job and  returns to ready mode     6  Press Color Start to begin color copying   Or  press Black Start to begin black and white copying    Z If the original is larger than the printable area  some portions may not  be printed   If you press Stop Clear or if no buttons are pressed for approximately  30 seconds  the machine cancels the copy job and returns to 
275. st    The file name you  have entered already  exists     Enter a different file  name           MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS  Install The corresponding Install the part into your   xxx  part of the machine is   machine    not installed   Invalid The color part of the Install the a Samsung    xxx  machine is not for genuine part designed    your machine     for your machine           File Name The file names you Delete unnecessary  Over Limit can use are from files    doc001 to doc999    However  all file   names are used   already   Fuser Fan There is a problem in   Open and then close the  Locked the cooling fan of the   front cover     machine     Install Toner  Vv    The color toner  cartridge is not  installed     Install the color toner  cartridge           Global Address    When the device is    Check the search ID     Invalid Toner  v    The color toner  cartridge you have  installed is not for your  machine     Install the a Samsung   genuine color toner  cartridge designed for  your machine           Not Found unable to locate the  given address of the  Global server   Global Query This is an error There are too many    Size Exceeded    message and displays  when the global query  size has been  exceeded     search results  Refine  your search by entering  more letters    Contact a LDAP server  administrator     Invalid Server    The server address    Enter the correct server             Global Server  Auth Failed    When there is a  authentication fail  while connecti
276. t   If you select  Poster lt 2x2 gt   the output will be automatically stretched  to cover 4 physical pages     ish    D e       NGA    A 3x3          CLL                                                       Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it  easier to pasting the sheets together     0 15 inches       T fay tela       itik       KO          0 15 inches                   Click the Paper tab  select the paper source  size  and  type    Click OK and print the document  You can complete the  poster by pasting the sheets together     Advanced Printing       20          Printing Booklets       This printer feature allows you to print your document on both  sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can  be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet     1    To change the print settings from your software  application  access the printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    From the Layout tab  choose Booklet Printing from the  Layout Type drop down list        NOTE  The Booklet Printing option is not available for all  paper sizes  In order to find out the available paper size for  this feature  select the paper size in the Size option on the  Paper tab  then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout  Type drop down list on the Layout tab is activated        3  4    Click the Paper tab  and select the paper source  size  and  type   Click OK and print the document     After printing  fold and staple the pages       
277. t  Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved  If  you select TIFF or PDF  you can select to scan multiple pages   Depending on the selected scan type  this option may not appear    To customize the settings before starting a scan job    1  Press Scan Email    2  Press Menu  27  until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK     3  Press the left right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press  OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  and press OK     5  Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK   Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options   7  When you have finished  press Stop Clear to return to ready mode        D    CHANGING THE DEFAULT SCAN SETTINGS    To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job  you can set up  default scan settings for each scan type     1  Press Scan Email    2  Press Menu  f5  until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    3  Press OK when Change Default appears    Press the left right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press OK     5  Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  and press OK     6  Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK   7  Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other settings     8  To change the default settings for other scan types  press Back   9   and repeat from step 4     9  Press St
278. t Attributes section and set the angle  of the watermark from the Message Angle section    5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the list    6 When you have finished editing  click OK and start  printing    To stop printing the watermark  select  No Watermark  from   the Watermark drop down list     Advanced Printing    22    Editing a Watermark    1 To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    2 Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the  Watermark section  The Edit Watermark window  appears    3 Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current  Watermarks list and change the watermark message and  options    4 Click Update to save the changes    5 Click OK until you exit the Print window     Deleting a Watermark    1 To change the print settings from your software  application  access printer properties  See    Printing a  Document    on page 14    2 From the Extras tab  click the Edit button in the  Watermark section  The Edit Watermark window  appears    3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current  Watermarks list and click Delete    4 Click OK until you exit the Print window                 Dear ABC          Regards       mo WORLD BEST                     WORLD BEST                     Using Overlays    What is an Overlay     An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard  disk drive  HDD  as a special file format that can be printed on  
279. t Setting appears and press OK     5  Press the left right arrow until the data type you want appears and press  OK     6  Press the left right arrow until the file containing the data you want to  restore appears and press OK     Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine   8  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     A w    N    MANAGING USB MEMORY       You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or  all at once by reformatting the device     A After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device  files cannot  be restored  Therefore  confirm that you no longer need the data  before deleting it     Deleting an image file   1  Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  machine    Press Scan Email     Press the left right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK   Press OK when Delete appears     Press the left right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and  press OK     D me wN    4 If you see D in the front of a folder name  there are one or more  files or folders in the selected folder     If you selected a file  the display shows the size of the file for about   2 seconds  Go to the next step    If you selected a folder  press the left right arrow until the file you want to  delete appears and press OK     7  Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection   8  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Formatting a USB memory device   1  Insert the USB memory device into the
280. t might be necessary for the Unified  Linux Driver software  all required packages will be carried onto  your system and installed automatically  this is possible on a  wide set of the most popular Linux clones     Using Your Printer in Linux       32          Installing the Unified Linux  Driver    Installing the Unified Linux Driver   1 Make sure that you connect your machine to your  computer  Turn both the computer and the machine on    2 When the Administrator Login window appears  type in  root in the Login field and enter the system password        NOTE  You must log in as a super user  root  to install the  printer software  If you are not a super user  ask your system  administrator        3 Insert the printer software CD ROM  The CD ROM will  automatically run     If the CD ROM does not automatically run  click the  ii  icon at the bottom of the desktop  When the Terminal  screen appears  type in     If the CD ROM is secondary master and the location to  mount is  mnt cdrom     root localhost root  mount  t iso9660  dev hdc  mnt   cdrom    root localhost root   cd  mnt cdrom  Linux   root localhost root    install sh    If you still failed to run the CD ROM  type the followings  in sequence     root localhost root  umount  dev hdc   root localhost root   mount  t iso9660  dev hdc  mnt   cdrom       NOTE  The installation program runs automatically if you  have an autorun software package installed and configured        4 When the welcome screen appears  click Next  
281. t to print document when port is  claimed by a scanning application    e Check if the port is not busy  Since functional  components of MFP  printer and scanner   share the same   O interface  port   the  situation of simultaneous access of different     consumer    application to the same port is  possible  To avoid possible conflicts  only  one of them at a time is allowed to gain  control over the device  The other     consumer    will encounter    device busy     response  You should open ports  configuration and select the port assigned to  your printer  In the Selected port pane you  can see if the port is occupied by some other  application  If this is the case  you should  wait for completion of the current job or  should press Release port button  if you are  sure that the present owner is not functioning  properly    e Check if your application has special print  option such as     oraw        If     oraw    is specified  in the command line parameter then remove  it to print properly  For Gimp front end  select     print      gt     Setup printer    and edit command  line parameter in the command item    e The CUPS  Common Unix Printing System   version distributed with SuSE Linux 9 2   cups 1 1 21  has a problem with ipp   Internet Printing Protocol  printing Use the  socket printing instead of ipp or install later  version of CUPS  cups 1 1 22 or higher      Some color images  come out in  unexpected color     This is a known bug in Ghostscript  until GNU  Ghosts
282. t would have been on the  specified discard segment    When the received fax contains pages larger than  the paper in your machine  and Auto Reduction  has been turned on  the machine will reduce the  fax to fit on the existing paper  and nothing will be  discarded           56 Faxing          OPTION DESCRIPTION       Junk Fax Setup   This setting may not be available depending on  your country  Using this feature  the system will  not accept faxes sent from remote stations whose  numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax  numbers  This feature is useful for blocking any  unwanted faxes    When you turn on this feature  you can access the  following options to set junk fax numbers    e Add  Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers     e Delete  Allows you to delete the desired junk  fax number    e Delete All  Allows you to delete all junk fax  numbers        DRPD Mode This mode enables a user to use a single  telephone line to answer several different  telephone numbers  In this menu  you can set the  machine to recognize which ring patterns to  answer  For details about this feature  see page    53        Duplex Print e Long Edge  Prints pages to be read like a  book    e Short Edge  Prints pages to be read by  flipping like a note pad    e Off  Prints received fax on one sides of a  paper           Changing the default document settings    The fax options  including resolution and darkness  can be set to the most  frequently used modes  When you send a fax  the default se
283. ter  UNC   this printer on a server checkbox  gS GTA      Select a printer from the list below  If you don t see your printer below  click   Update  to refresh the list     7 After the installation is finished  a window appears asking Printer Name CO Pona    you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user    of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from             Samsung  If you so desire  select the corresponding NOTE Wa ewal has been enabled on this PC  thie may be prevenia  Update  checkbox  es  and click Finish    this PC before continuing with the installation           Otherwise  just click Finish           lt Back  re  Cancel p       If you do not see your printer on the list  click Update to    refresh the list  or select Add TCP  IP Port to add your             Setup Completed    Ontine Registration i printer to the network  To add the printer to the  E a koa aa l network  enter the port name and the IP address for the  l printer     Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership     e To find a shared network printer  UNC Path   select  Shared Printer  UNC  and enter the shared name  manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  button     You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any  item individually     T Ye           T I dlike to print a test page                             NOTE  If your printer is not already connected to the  l computer  the following window will appear           NOTE  After s
284. ter yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to    receive information from Samsung  select the checkbox and  click Finish  You are now sent to the Samsung web site     Cancel   i    e After connecting the printer  click Next    f    e If you don   t want to connect the printer at this time  click l ee  Next  and No on the following screen  Then the installation   Setup Completed  will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the    installation   e The installation window that appears in this User s    Guide may differ depending on the printer and    interface in use  l                Otherwise  just click Finish           On line Registration  You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips  and promotions  Also you will get more customer care     Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership                             7  Installing Printer Software in Windows    Installing Software for Network      Printing    When you connect your printer to a network  you must first  configure the TCP IP settings for the printer  After you have i  assigned and verified the TCP IP settings  you are ready to  install the software on each computer on the network     You can install the printer software using the typical or custom      method     Typical I nstallation    This is recommended for most users  All components necessary      4 Select Typical installation for a network printer  Click    Next     Select Installation
285. test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in  order to receive information from Samsung  If you so desire  select the  corresponding checkbox es  and click Finish        Setup Completed    Online Registration  You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips  and promotions  Also you will get more customer care        Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership           JT I d like to print a test page     SAMSUNG                 L  e If your machine does not work properly after the installation  try   to reinstall the printer driver  See Software section   e During the printer driver installation process  the driver installer   detects the location information for your operating system and  sets the default paper size for your machine  If you use a  different Windows location  you must change the paper size to  match the paper you usually use  Go to printer properties to  change the paper size after installation is complete     28 Getting started       MACHINE S BASIC SETTINGS       After installation is complete  you may want to set the machine s default  settings  Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values     Altitude adjustment    The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure  which is determined  by the height of the machine above sea level  The following information will  guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality  of print     Befo
286. that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this  time  Because the wireless devices  which may be embedded into your printer  emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety  standards and recommendations  manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use  Regardless of the power levels  care should be taken  to minimize human contact during normal operation    As a general guideline  a separation of 20 cm  8 inches  between the wireless device and the body  for use of a wireless device near the body   this does not include extremities  is typical  This device should be used more than 20 cm  8 inches  from the body when wireless devices are  on and transmitting    This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter    Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices  Examples of common restrictions are listed below    Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft  Current aviation regulations require wireless  devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane  IEEE 802 11  also known as wireless Ethernet  and Bluetooth communication devices  are examples of devices that provide wireless communication    In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful  the option to use a wireless  device may be restricted or eliminated  Airports  Hospitals  and
287. this user s guide     ADF    An Automatic Document Feeder  ADF  is a mechanism that will  automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can  scan some amount of the paper at once     AppleTalk    AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple  Inc for  computer networking  It was included in the original Macintosh  1984   and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking     BIT Depth    A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to  represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image  Higher color  depth gives a broader range of distinct colors  As the number of bits  increases  the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for  a color map  1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and  white     BMP    A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows  graphics subsystem  GDI   and used commonly as a simple graphics file  format on that platform     BOOTP    Bootstrap Protocol  A network protocol used by a network client to  obtain its IP address automatically  This is usually done in the bootstrap  process of computers or operating systems running on them  The  BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each  client  BOOTP enables  diskless workstation    computers to obtain an IP  address prior to loading any advanced operating system     CCD    Charge Coupled Device  CCD  is a hardware which enables the scan  job  CCD Locking mechanism
288. ti   purpose tray  See page  37           Global Server  Comm Error    This error message  displays when there is  a communication error  between the global  server and the device     Try again   Contact a LDAP Server  administrator     Memory Full    The memory is full     Delete unnecessary fax  jobs and retransmit after  more memory becomes  available  Alternatively   split the transmission  into more than one  operation           Group Not  Available       You have tried to  select a group location  number where only a  single location  number can be used   such as when adding  locations for a Multiple  Send operation        Use a speed dial number  or dial a number  manually using the  number keypad     MP Tray  Paper Jam 0    Paper has jammed in  the feeding area of the  multi purpose tray     Clear the jam  See page  T3        Network Error       There is a problem  with the network        Contact your network  administrator              Troubleshooting_ 79          MESSAGE    MEANING    SUGGESTED  SOLUTIONS             SUGGESTED  MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS  Not Assigned The speed button or Enter the number  speed dial number manually using the  you tried to use has number keypad or store  no number assigned the number or address   to it   Not Available Can not perform the Try again when current    Try Again Later    task immediately  because too many  tasks are running at  once     task is completed     Refilled Toner  v    The toner cartridge  you have installed is   
289. tiaieliainiiidadouasdidadiaabialadbkaandaatindaa E Da EOE Ek 44  Printing  a DOCUMENE aasahan ahaha NA napana Dba naan 44  Changing Printer Settings                     aa asana asana nanan kA SAREE trt NN NANANA REA NANE NANA REK tanta nea eee 44  Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper              2 2   aaasanaaaasasasanananaanananananansanananannawa 46  Duplex Printing maana e ea e aah Ta GN NANANG aes 46  a ensia e shelaehensshanasbaouns shoei cede T E sada peenaseee sexta hd e EE Ei 47  SCANNING WIEN USB saisies GNG BA NG BG BABAENG ARNAN GR 47  Scanning with network          ana aa aNG GN GN GANAN AN ENGR NN rtrt AREA NANANG NE NER EN nett ties 47  Setting scan information in Scan Manager          cece cece ene ne eee 47    Installing Printer  Software in Windows    This chapter includes    e Installing Printer Software   e Reinstalling Printer Software  e Removing Printer Software    e Installing mono printer driver       NOTE  The following procedure is based on Windows XP  for  other operating systems  refer to the corresponding Windows  user s guide or online help           Installing Printer Software    You can install the printer software for local printing or network  printing  To install the printer software on the computer   perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on  the printer in use     A printer driver is software that lets your computer  communicate with your printer  The procedure to install drivers  may differ depending on the op
290. ting from a USB memory device  To print a document from a USB memory device   Backing up data  Backing up data  Restoring data  Managing USB memory  Deleting an image file  Formatting a USB memory device  Viewing the USB memory status    Printing reports  Printing a report   Adjusting the color contrast   Clearing memory   Cleaning your machine  Cleaning the outside  Cleaning the inside  Cleaning the scan unit   Maintaining the cartridge  Toner cartridge storage  Expected cartridge life  Redistributing toner   Replacing the toner cartridge    Contents       67 Clearing the Toner Empty message   68 Replacing the paper transfer belt   69 Maintenance parts   69 Checking replaceables   69 Replacing the DADF  or ADF  rubber pad  70 Managing your machine from the website  70 To access SyncThru    Web Service    70 Checking the machine   s serial number    TROUBLESHOOTING 71 Tips for avoiding paper jams  71 Clearing document jams  71 Input Misfeed  72 Exit misfeed    72 Roller misfeed   73 Clearing paper jams   73 In the paper feed area  74 In the multi purpose tray  75 In the fuser unit area   76 In the paper exit area    77 In the optional tray   78 Understanding display messages  81 Solving other problems   81 Paper feeding   82 Printing problems   83 Printing quality problems   85 Copying problems    86 Scanning problems   86 Samsung Scan Manager problems  86 Fax problems   87 Common PostScript problems   87 Common Windows problems   88 Common Linux problems   90 Common Macintos
291. to another computer  and try a print job that you  know works  Finally  try a  new printer cable        The wrong printer  driver was selected     Check the application   s  printer selection menu to  ensure that your machine is  selected        The software  application is  malfunctioning     Try printing a job from  another application        The operating  system is  malfunctioning     Exit Windows and reboot the  computer  Turn the machine  off and then back on again           The machine may  be configured  incorrectly     Check the printer properties  to ensure that all of the print  settings are correct        The printer driver  may be incorrectly  installed     Repair the printer software   See the Software section        The machine is  malfunctioning     Check the display message  on the control panel to see if  the machine is indicating a  system error     Pages print  but  are blank     The toner cartridge  is defective or out of  toner     Redistribute the toner  if  necessary  See page 65   If necessary  replace the  toner cartridge        The file may have  blank pages     Check the file to ensure that  it does not contain blank  pages        Some parts  such as  the controller or the  board  may be  defective     Contact a service  representative           The document size  is so big that the  hard disk space of  the computer is not  enough to access  the print job     Get more hard disk space  and print the document  again        The machine  selects print 
292. to the machine        5  Close the front cover  Make sure the cover is securely latched     N If the front cover is not completely closed  the machine will not  operate     REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE       The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each   one  yellow  Y   magenta  M   cyan  C   and black  K     e The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicates  which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced    e For the CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX  incoming faxes are  saved in memory    At this stage  the toner cartridge needs to be replaced  Check the type of   toner cartridge for your machine   See    on page 91      1  Turn the machine off  then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool   2  Using the handle  completely open the front cover        A   Do not touch the green surface  the OPC drum or the front of  each toner cartridge  with your hands or any other material  Use  the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area    e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt    e If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes  the  OPC drum can be exposed to light  This will cause damage to the  OPC drum  Close the front cover should the installation need to  be halted for any reason        3  Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the    cartridge from the machine        A When you open the front cover  be careful not to touch the   
293. top     Click the S3 button to switch to Scanners Configuration     Select the scanner on the list     s Unified Driver Configurator        Scanners configuration               About    CG      k Click your    scanner           m Selected scanner   Vendor   Model   Type     a    la    BACTAGNCS                   When you have only one MFP device and it is connected  to the computer and turned on  your scanner appears on  the list and is automatically selected     If you have two or more scanners attached to your  computer  you can select any scanner to work at any  time  For example  while acquisition is in progress on the  first scanner  you may select the second scanner  set the  device options and start the image acquisition  simultaneously    Click Properties     Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF   Automatic Document Feeder  or face down on the  document glass    Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window     The document is scanned and the image preview appears  in the Preview Pane        ts Scanner Properties                                                     Preview Scan  r Image Quality  Color Composition  Color   16 Million Colors      Resolution  dpi   300         Scan Area   Page Format  AA   210x297 mm  z   Aavonced Drag the pointer to  Document Source    pito m set the image area  to be scanned   SS  Delete Save As    im Reed    Default JI                     Press F1 for Help                7 Change the scan options in the Image Quality a
294. tremely fine detail  Super    Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with  which you are communicating also supports the  Super Fine resolution     64 e For memory transmission  Super Fine  mode is not available  The resolution  setting is automatically changed to  Fine    e When your machine is set to Super  Fine resolution and the fax machine  with which you are communicating does  not support Super Fine resolution  the  machine transmits using the highest  resolution mode supported by the other  fax machine        Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or  photographs           Press the left right arrow until Machine Fax No  appears and press OK        Z The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job  To change the  default setting  see page 57     Darkness   You can select the default contrast mode to fax your originals lighter or   darker    1  Press Fax    2  Press Menu  f3    and then OK when Fax Feature appears on the  bottom line of the display    3  Press OK when Darkness appears    4  Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears and press  OK    5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode    14 The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job  To change   the default setting  see page 57     Faxing_ 51    Sending a fax automatically   1  Press Fax    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original   face down on the scanner glass    For details about loading an original  see page 32    Ready to 
295. ttings are used  if they are not changed by using the corresponding button and menu    1  Press Fax    2  Press Menu    2  until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK   Press OK when Resolution appears     5  Press the left right arrow until the resolution you want appears and press  OK     6  Press the left right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK     7  Press the left right arrow until the darkness you want appears and press  OK     8  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Bo    Printing sent fax report automatically   You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the   previous 50 communication operations  including time and dates    1  Press Fax    2  Press Menu  23  until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Auto Report appears and press OK    Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK    5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     P       Setting up Address Book    You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most  frequently  Your machine provides you with the following features for setting  up Address Book    e Speed buttons   e Speed Group dial numbers    64 Before beginning to store fax numbers  make sure that your machine  is in Fax mode     Speed buttons    The 15 speed buttons on the control panel lets you store frequently used
296. tton instead    4  Click the Extra tab and click Job Setting    5  Select the print mode you want from the drop down list    Normal  Prints in normal mode    Proof  Prints the first file and after a pause prints the next file    Confidentical  Stores the files  securing them with a password    Store  Stores the file to the hard disk    Spool  Spools the file into the hard disk and prints it from the hard   disk queue   e Delay  Prints the file at a specified time    6  Enter the user   s name and file name    7  Click OK until the Print window is displayed    8  Click OK or Print to start printing     Printing a stored job   You can print jobs currently stored in the hard disk    1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    2  Press the left right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Store Job appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the user   s name and file name you  want appear and press OK        5  If the select file is a confidential print job  enter the specified 4 digit  password   Press the left right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK  The  cursor automatically moves to the next digit position  Enter the 2nd   3rd  and 4th digit in the same way    6  When Print appears  press OK   If you enter the incorrect password  Invalid Password appears   Reenter the correct password     7  Press the left right arrow until the number of copies you want
297. u Office   e Scanning Process with TWAI N enabled Software  e Scanning Using the WIA Driver       NOTE     e Check the Operating System s  that are compatible  with your printer  Please refer to the OS Compatibility  section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s  Guide     e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD   ROM     e The maximum resolution that can be achieved  depends upon various factors  including computer  speed  available disk space  memory  the size of the  image being scanned  and bit depth settings  Thus   depending on your system and what you are scanning   you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions   especially using enhanced dpi        Scanning       27             Send to bar __    Asag Pob LAW  3        Scanning Using Samsung  SmarThru Office    Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for  your machine  You can use SmarThru Office to scan images  or documents from local or network scanners     Using Samsung SmarThru Office   Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru Office    1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  and properly connected to each other     2 Place your photograph or page on the document glass or  DADF  or ADF      3 Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru Office  you  will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop   Double click the SmarThru Office icon        a Double click this icon     Smar Thru    Office    The SmarThru Office window opens                  
298. u entered     1  Press Fax    2  Press Menu    3  until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK   Press OK when Fax appears     DAA    Press the left right arrow to select On and press OK     Press the left right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK        7  Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent  and press OK    8  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode   Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax  machine     Forwarding sent faxes to email address    You can set the machine to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a  specified destination  in addition to the email address you entered     1  Press Fax    2  Press Menu    2  until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until E mail appears and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow to select On and press OK    Enter your email address and press OK    Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK   Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email  address     DO ND OF     Forwarding received faxes to another fax machine    You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to another fax  number during a specified
299. uidelines in this section and  still not produce satisfactory results  This may be the result of  improper handling  unacceptable temperature and humidity levels   or other variables over which Samsung has no control    e Before purchasing large quantities of print media  ensure that it  meets the requirements specified in this user s guide     AN Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause    problems  requiring repairs  Such repairs are not covered by  Samsung s warranty or service agreements     Loading originals and print media 33    Specifications on print media                                                                   TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHTA CAPACITY    Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm  8 5 x 11 inches  e 60 to 105 g m   16 to 28 lb    250 sheets of 75 g m     bond  for the tray  20 Ib bond  paper for the  Legal 216 x 356 mm  8 5 x 14 inches    60 to 163 g m   16 to 43 Ib tray  bond  for th Iti  e 100 sheets of 75 g m   US Folio 216 x 330 mm  8 5 x 13 inches  ee e na    purpose tray  A4 210 x 297 mm  8 26 x 11 69 inches     500 sheets of 75 g m   Oficio 216 x 343 mm  8 5 x 13 5 inches   20 Ib bond  paper for  optional tray  JIS B5 182 x 257 mm  7 16 x 10 11 inches   ISO B5 176 x 250 mm  6 93 x 9 84 inches   Executive 184 x 267 mm  7 25 x 10 5 inches   A5 148 x 210 mm  5 82 x 8 26 inches  e 60 to 105 g m   16 to 28 Ib    150 sheets of 75 g m   bond  for the tray  20 Ib bond  paper for the  Statement 140 x 216 mm  5 5 x 8 5 inches    60
300. until Copy Feature appears on the  bottom line of the display and press OK    4  Press OK when Edge Erase appears    5  Press the left right arrow until the binding option you  want appears   e Off  Does not set the binding option   e Small Original  Erases the edge of the original if it is small   e Hole Punch  Erases the marks of bookbinding holes   e Book Center  Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and   horizontal  when you copy a book                                   e Border Erase  Erases the certain amount of the edge of the printout     6  Press OK to begin copying    7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode    Gray enhance copying   When you copy the original in gray scale  use this feature for the better   quality of copy output  This feature is only for the copy in gray scale    1  Press Copy    2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original  face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32    3  Press Menu  23  until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the   display and press OK    Press OK when Gray Enhance appears    Press the left right arrow to select On    Press OK to begin copying    Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     PRINTING ON BOTH SIDES OF PAPER    SO Ol       By using the Duplex button on your machine  you can set the machine to  print documents on both sides of paper   1  Press Copy   2  Press Duplex   3  Press the left right arrow until the binding opt
301. untries     In the event of problems  you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd  in the first instance     The product has been tested against TBR21  To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard  the  European Telecommunication Standards Institute  ETSI  has issued an advisory document  EG 201 121  which contains notes and additional  requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals  The product has been designed against  and is fully compliant with  all of the  relevant advisory notes contained in this document     10 Safety information    European Radio Approval Information    for products fitted with EU approved radio devices    Low power  Radio LAN type devices  radio frequency  RF  wireless communication devices   operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band  may be  present  embedded  in your printer system which is intended for home or office use  This section is only applicable if these devices are  present  Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices     Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with CE a  Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label    The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the  European Commission through the R amp TTE directive     Europ
302. ur  computer     2    Configuring group email numbers   Enter your machine   s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to  access the web site of your machine    1  Click Machine Settings and E mail Setup    2  Click Group Address Book and Add    3  Select a group number and enter the group name you want    4  Select speed email numbers that will be included in the group    5  Click Apply     Retrieving global email addresses from the LDAP  server  You can use not only local addresses stored in your machine s memory but    also ones in the LDAP server  To use the global addresses  configure the  LDAP server first via SyncThru    Web Service as following     1  Enter your machine   s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go   to access the web site of your machine    Click Machine Settings  LDAP Server Setup    Select IP Address or Host Name    Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name    Enter the server port number  from 1 to 65535    The default port number is 389    6  Enter Search Root Directory  The top search level of the LDAP  directory tree   7  Select Authentication method  Method of LDAP server login   Anonymous  This is used to bind with NULL password and login ID   Password and login ID are grayed in SWS    Simple  This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS    8  Puta check mark of Append Root to Base DN for adding Base DN to  login name    9  Enter your login name  password  maximum number of search results  
303. urce code must retain the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer    2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution    3  All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment   This product includes  software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit   http   www openssl org      4  The names  OpenSSL Toolkit  and  OpenSSL Project  must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  without   5  prior written permission  For written permission  please contact openssl core openssl org    6  Products derived from this software may not be called  OpenSSL  nor may  OpenSSL  appear in their names without prior written  permission of the OpenSSL Project     7  Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment   This product includes software developed by the  OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit  http   www openssl org       THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT    AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT  NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN  NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDE
304. ustrie et Sciences Canada     UNITED STATES OF AMERICA       Federal Communications Commission  FCC     Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15   Low power  Radio LAN type devices  radio frequency  RF  wireless communication devices   operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band  may be  present  embedded  in your printer system  This section is only applicable if these devices are present  Refer to the system label to verify the  presence of wireless devices    Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system  label    The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm  8 inches  separation between the device and the body  for use of a wireless device near the  body  this does not include extremities   This device should be used more than 20 cm  8 inches  from the body when wireless devices are on   The power output of the wireless device  or devices   which may be embedded in your printer  is well below the RF exposure limits as set by  the FCC    This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter    Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions  1  This device may not cause harmful interference  and 2  this device must  accept any interference received  including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device    Wireless devices are not user serviceable  Do not modify them in any way  Modification to a wireless 
305. ut  which is not itself copied or derived from something else     OSI    Open Systems Interconnection  OSI  is a model developed by the  International Organization for Standardization  ISO  for communications   OSI offers a standard  modular approach to network design that divides  the required set of complex functions into manageable  self contained   functional layers  The layers are  from top to bottom  Application   Presentation  Session  Transport  Network  Data Link and Physical     104 Glossary       PABX   A private automatic branch exchange  PABX  is an automatic telephone  switching system within a private enterprise    PCL    Printer Command Language  PCL  is a Page Description Language   PDL  developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an  industry standard  Originally developed for early inkjet printers  PCL has  been released in varying levels for thermal  matrix printer  and page  printers     PDF  Portable Document Format  PDF  is a proprietary file format developed  by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a  device independent and resolution independent format    PostScript   PostScript  PS  is a page description language and programming  language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas     that is run in an interpreter to generate an image    Printer Driver   A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer  to the printer    Print Media    The media like paper  envelopes  labels  and t
306. ut Tab      Paper Tab    Graphics Tab      Extras Tab    About Tab      Printer Tab      Using a Favorite Setting    Using Help         Printing a Document         NOTES     e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this    User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use     However the composition of the printer properties window is  similar    e Check the Operating System s  that are compatible  with your printer  Please refer to the OS Compatibility  section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s  Guide    e If you need to know the exact name of your printer  you can  check the supplied CD ROM       When you select an option in printer properties  you may see      an exclamation A mark or   mark  An exclamation mark  means you can select that certain option but it is not    recommended  and   mark means you cannot select that    option due to the machine s setting or environment        The following procedure describes the general steps required  for printing from various Windows applications  The exact steps    for printing a document may vary depending on the application  program you are using  Refer to the User s Guide of your    software application for the exact printing procedure  l  1 Open the document you want to print        2 Select Print from the File menu  The Print window is          displayed  It may look slightly different depending on your  application        14  Basic Printing       The basic print settings are selected with
307. value and key  position  for example  Key 1  configured on other wireless devices in the  network     1  Press Menu  23  until Network appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    Press the left right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK    Press the left right arrow until WLAN Security appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Static WEP appears and press OK   Press the left right arrow until Encryption appears and press OK     oe    64 If you have set the authentication type to Open System  the  Encryption menu does not display   6  Set each encryption option and press OK     e Encrypt  Type  Select an encryption type  None  64 bit WEP  or  128 bit WEP     e Key Type  Select the key type of your network   e Using Key  Select the key to be used in your network   e Edit Key  Enter the key number for the selected key position     Installing accessories 95    The numbers you can enter as follows        HEXADECIMAL ALPHANUMERIC  64 bit WEP 10 digits  128 bit WEP 26 digits       5 characters       13 characters             7  When you have finished  press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Restoring default values for wireless networking    If the problem occurrs when you use or set up the wireless network values   take following stops to restore factory default values  Generally  factory  values of wireless networking are optimized for your printer     1  Press Menu  23  until Network appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK   
308. ve can also cause  damage to machine components    Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine   more than once  The adhesive backing is designed   for only a single pass through the machine    Do not use labels that are separating from the   backing sheet or are wrinkled  bubbled  or otherwise   damaged        Card stock or  custom sized    Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm wide or  356 mm long           1 Acceptable       2 Unacceptable          materials e In the software application  set margins at least  6 4 mm away from the edges of the material    Preprinted e Letterhead must be printed with heat resistant ink   paper that will not melt  vaporize  or release hazardous       emissions when subjected to the printer   s fusing  temperature for 0 1 second  Check your machine   s  specification to view the fusing temperature  see  page 99    Letterhead ink must be non flammable and should  not adversely affect printer rollers    Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a  moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during  storage    Before you load preprinted paper  such as forms  and letterhead  verify that the ink on the paper is  dry  During the fusing process  wet ink can come off  preprinted paper  reducing print quality           Loading originals and print media_ 35    CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE  PAPER TRAY       To load longer sizes of paper  such as Legal sized paper  you need to  adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray        1 Tray
309. wer Save mode    Power Save mode allows your machine to reduce power consumption   when it is not in actual use  You can turn this mode on and select a   length of time for which the machine waits after a job is printed before it   switches to a reduced power state    1  Press Menu  23  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK     2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears   3  Press the left right arrow until Power Save appears and press OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  press OK     5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Scan Power Save mode    Scan Power Save mode allows you to save power by turning off the  scan lamp  The scan lamp under the scanner glass automatically turns  off when it is not in actual use to reduce power consumption and extend  the life of the lamp  The lamp automatically wakes up after some warm   up time when you start scanning     You can set the length of time for which the scan lamp waits after a scan  job is completed before it switches to the power save mode     30 Getting started       1  Press Menu  2  until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  the display and press OK     2  Press OK when Machine Setup appears     3  Press the left right arrow until Scan PWR Save appears and press  OK     4  Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  press OK     5  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     Setting print job timeout   
310. wering machine plugged into  the EXT socket  You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time   Before using the DRPD option  Distinctive Ring service must be installed on  your telephone line by the telephone company  To set up DRPD  you will  need another telephone line at your location  or someone available to dial  your fax number from outside    To set up the DRPD mode    1  Press Fax     2  Press Menu  f5  until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  display and press OK    3  Press the left right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK    4  Press the left right arrow until DRPD Mode appears and press OK   Waiting Ring appears on the display    5  Call your fax number from another telephone  It is not necessary to  place the call from a fax machine    6  When your machine begins to ring  do not answer the call  The machine  requires several rings to learn the pattern   When the machine completes learning  the display shows Completed  DRPD Setup  If the DRPD setup fails  Error DRPD Ring appears   Press OK when DRPD Mode appears and start over from step 4    7  Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode     64 e DRPD must be set up again if you re assign your fax number  or  connect the machine to another telephone line    e After DRPD has been set up  call your fax number again to verify  that the machine answers with a fax tone  Then have a call placed  to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call  is forwarded to the extension telephone
311. when there seems to be  a consistent problem with paper pickup or when its specified yield is reached     For the ADF   CLX 6200FX only   1  Open the ADF cover     2  Rotate the bushing on the right end of the ADF roller toward the ADF  and remove the roller from the slot        1 Bushing       2 ADF roller             1 ADF rubber pad       BP    Insert a new ADF rubber pad into place    5  Align the left end of the ADF roller with the slot and push the right  end of the roller into the right slot  Rotate the bushing on the right  end of the roller toward the document input tray           6  Close the ADF cover     70 Maintenance       For the DADF    CLX 6200ND  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only    1  Open the DADF cover    2  Remove the DADF rubber pad from the DADF  as shown        1 DADF rubber  pad          3  Insert a new DADF rubber pad into place   4  Close the DADF cover     MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE  WEBSITE       If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP  network parameters correctly  you can manage the machine via Samsung s  SyncThru    Web Service  an embedded web server  Use SyncThru     Web Service to    View the machine s device information and check its current status   Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters   Change the printer properties    Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the  machine s status    e Get support for using the machine     To access SyncThru    Web Service   1  Start a we
312. while a print job is in  progress  Known versions of CUPS server  break the print job whenever print options are  changed and then try to restart the job from the  beginning  Since Unified Linux Driver locks port  while printing  the abrupt termination of the  driver keeps the port locked and therefore  unavailable for subsequent print jobs  If this  situation occurred  try to release the port           Some color images  come out all black        This is a known bug in Ghostscript  until GNU  Ghostscript version 7 05  when the base color  space of the document is indexed color space  and it is converted through CIE color space   Because Postscript uses CIE color space for  Color Matching System  you should upgrade  Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  Ghostscript version 7 06 or later  You can find  recent Ghostscript versions at  www ghostscript com           Troubleshooting_ 89       CONDITION    SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS       The machine does  not appear on the  scanners list        e    Check if your machine is attached to your  computer  Make sure that it is connected  properly via the USB port and is turned on   Check if the scanner driver for your machine  is installed in your system  Open Unified  Driver configurator  switch to Scanners  configuration  then press Drivers  Make sure  that driver with a name corresponding to  your machine s name is listed in the window   Check if the port is not busy  Since functional  components of MFP  printer and scanner   share t
313. work  email  FTP  SMB  Network     e For network scanning using the authentication feature  you must  register the network or local authentication configuration using the  SyncThru    Web Service    e User authentication has 3 options  none  Default   network  authentication  and local authentication        Registering local authorized users    1  Enter your machine   s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  Go to access the web site of your machine     2  Click Machine Settings     3  Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User  Authentication web page     4  Click Add     5  Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the  entry  from 1 to 50     6  Enter your name  auth ID  password  e mail address and phone  number   You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the  machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel     7  Click Apply     Register authorized network users   1  Enter your machine   s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  Go to access the web site of your machine    2  Click Machine Settings     3  Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User  Authentication web page     Click Apply and OK    Select the Authentication Type that you prefer   Configure the values for each feature  as follows   Click Apply     SS oe    Network user authenticated by Kerberos  1  Enter the realm used for Kerberos login   2  Select IP Address or Host Name   3  Enter the IP address in dotte
314. xplains how to use a USB memory device with your machine     This chapter includes     e About USB memory  e Plugging ina USB memory device     Scanning to a USB memory device    ABOUT USB MEMORY       USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to   give you more room for storing documents  presentations  downloaded   music and videos  high resolution photographs  or whatever other files you   want to store or move    You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device    e Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device    e Print data stored on a USB memory device    e Back up Address Book  Phone Book entries and the system settings  of your machine   CLX 6200FX  CLX 6210FX  CLX 6240FX only    e Restore backup files to the machine   s memory   CLX 6200FX  CLX   6210FX  CLX 6240FX only    e Format the USB memory device    e Check the available memory space     PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE       The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB  V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices  Your machine supports USB memory  devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes    Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer    You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type  connector        z   o  i  O X    Use only a metal shielded USB memory device           e Printing from a USB memory device  e Backing up data  e Managing USB memory    Insert a USB memory device into the USB memor
315. y   4  Ifyou want to customize the copy settings including copy size  darkness   and original type  by using the control panel buttons  See page 39   If necessary  you can use special copy features  such as poster copying   2  or 4 up copying  See page 40   5  Press Color Start to begin color copying   Or  press Black Start to begin black and white copying   64 You can cancel the copy job during an operation  Press Stop Clear   and the copying will stop     ad    CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY       Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly  and easily make a copy  However  if you want to change the options for  each copy  use the copy function buttons on the control panel     Z If you press Stop Clear while setting the copy options  all of the  options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and  returned to their default status  Or  they will automatically return to  their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress        ID card copying   Using special copy features  Printing on both sides of paper  Setting copy timeout    Darkness   If you have an original containing faint markings and dark images  you can  adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read    To adjust the darkness of copies  press Darkness  Each time you press the  button  the following modes are available    e Lightest  Works well with darker print    e Light  Works well with dark print    e Normal  Works well with stand
316. y port on the front of your  machine        AN   Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in  operation  or writing to or reading from USB memory  The  machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use   s  misuse    e If your USB memory device has certain features  such as security  settings and password settings  your machine may not  automatically detect it  For details about these features  see the  device s User s Guide     SCANNING TO A USB MEMORY DEVICE    You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB  memory device  There are two ways of doing this  you can scan to the  device using the default settings  or you can customize your own scan  settings        Scanning  1  Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  machine     2  Load originals face up into the DADF  or ADF   or place a single original  face down on the scanner glass   For details about loading an original  see page 32   Press Scan Email   Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display   5  Press OK  Color Start or Black Start when USB appears   Regardless of the button you press  the color mode is decided as  customized  See    Customizing Scan to USB    on page 60   Your machine begins scanning the original  and then asks if you want to  scan another page     BO    Using USB flash memory 59    6  Press OK when Yes appears to scan more pages  Load an original and  press Color Start or Black Start   Regardless of the button you press
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
エプソン 電子黒板  pdf - 1 MB  STORE-IT-OUT ARC  Adder Technology AV4DVI Switch User Manual  I73 - Bale Shear Manuel de  Billion Electric Company 7560G User's Manual  Sika® SolarMount-1  ウッドブラインド クレール 防炎・耐水タイプ50 ループコード式  保証約款  MANUALE USO E MANUTENZIONE Riscaldatori elettrici a    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file